Pteridines as FGFR inhibitors

ABSTRACT

The invention relates to new pteridine derivative compounds, of formula (I), to pharmaceutical compositions comprising said compounds, to processes for the preparation of said compounds and to the use of said compounds in the treatment of diseases, e.g. cancer.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/404,175, filed with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office on Nov. 26, 2014, which is a national stage filing under section 371 of International Application No. PCT/GB2013/051427, filed on May 30, 2013, and published in English on Dec. 5, 2013 as WO 2013/179033, and claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/653,081, filed on May 30, 2012, to U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/782,233, filed on Mar. 14, 2013, and to British Application No. 1209613.7, filed on May 30, 2012. The entire disclosures of each of the prior applications are hereby incorporated herein by reference.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The invention relates to new pteridine derivative compounds, to pharmaceutical compositions comprising said compounds, to processes for the preparation of said compounds and to the use of said compounds in the treatment of diseases, e.g. cancer.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

According to a first aspect of the invention there is provided compounds of formula (I):

including any tautomeric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein

-   W is —N(R³)— or —C(R^(3a)R^(3b))—; -   each R² is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano,     C₁₋₄alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, C₂₋₄alkynyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl,     hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, haloC₁₋₄alkyl, haloC₁₋₄alkoxy,     hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl,     haloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl wherein each C₁₋₄alkyl     may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups,     hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with R¹³,     C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with     R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with —C(═O)—R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl     substituted with —NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸,     C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with —NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with     —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸, —NR⁷R⁸ and —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸; or when two R² groups are     attached to adjacent carbon atoms they may be taken together to form     a radical of formula:     —O—(C(R¹⁷)₂)_(p)—O—;     —X—CH═CH—; or     —X—CH═N—;     wherein R¹⁷ represents hydrogen or fluorine, p represents 1 or 2 and     X represents O or S; -   D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic     carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic     heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O     or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be     optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups; -   R¹ represents hydrogen, halo, cyano, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy,     —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl,     hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein     each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two     hydroxyl groups, —NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵, —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵,     —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl-NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵,     —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted     with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶,     —C(═O)—R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; -   R^(3a) represents —NR¹⁰R¹¹, hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy,     C₁₋₆alkoxy substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl,     C₂₋₆alkynyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with     —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with     —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkenyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl,     hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may     optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with     —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy,     C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     R⁹ and optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and     R⁹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with     R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted     with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     one or two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹²,     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted     with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,     —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ or     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; -   R^(3b) represents hydrogen or hydroxyl; provided that if R^(3a)     represents —NR¹⁰R¹¹, then R^(3b) represents hydrogen; or -   R^(3a) and R^(3b) are taken together to form ═O, to form ═NR¹⁰, to     form cyclopropyl together with the carbon atom to which they are     attached, to form ═CH—C₀₋₄alkyl substituted with R^(3c), or to form

wherein ring A is a monocyclic 5 to 7 membered saturated heterocycle containing one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heteroatom not being positioned in alpha position of the double bond, wherein ring A is optionally being substituted with cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, H₂N—C₁₋₄alkyl, (C₁₋₄alkyl)NH—C₁₋₄alkyl, (C₁₋₄alkyl)₂N—C₁₋₄alkyl, (haloC₁₋₄alkyl)NH—C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, —C(═O)—NH₂, —C(═O)—N H(C₁₋₄alkyl), —C(═O)—N(C₁₋₄alkyl)₂;

-   R^(3c) represents hydrogen, hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, R⁹, —NR¹⁰R¹¹,     —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, cyano, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl or —CH(OH)—C₁₋₆alkyl; -   R³ represents hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxy     substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl,     haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,     hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,     hydroxyC₂₋₆alkenyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,     cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may     optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with     —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy,     C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     R⁹ and optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and     R⁹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with     R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted     with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     one or two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹²,     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted     with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,     —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ or     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; -   R⁴ and R⁵ each independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl,     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,     haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein     each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two     hydroxyl groups, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,     —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)—R¹³,     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted     with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted     with R¹³; -   R⁶ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to     7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one     heteroatom selected from N, O or S; said C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,     C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl,     optionally and each independently being substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4 or     5 substituents, each substituent independently being selected from     cyano, C₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl,     hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, halogen, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,     C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵,     —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,     —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted     with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵; -   R⁷ and R⁸ each independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl,     hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl or     C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl; -   R⁹ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or     3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at     least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,     C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic     or bicyclic heterocyclyl each optionally and each independently     being substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each     substituent independently being selected from ═O, C₁₋₄alkyl,     hydroxyl, carboxyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, cyano, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl,     C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C(═O)—,     C₁₋₄alkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl wherein each C₁₋₄alkyl may     optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, halogen,     haloC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,     C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with     —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkoxy, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl,     —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₄alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with     —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl,     C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl     substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl     substituted with R¹³, phenyl optionally substituted with R¹⁶,     phenylC₁₋₆alkyl wherein the phenyl is optionally substituted with     R¹⁶, a 5 or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclyl containing     at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S wherein said     heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R¹⁶;     or when two of the substituents of R⁹ are attached to the same atom,     they may be taken together to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated     monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected     from N, O or S; -   R¹⁰ and R¹¹ each independently represent hydrogen, carboxyl,     C₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵,     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, haloC₁₋₆alkyl,     hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy,     C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be     substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with R⁶, —C(═O)—R⁶, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,     —C(═O)-hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,     —C(═O)-hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃,     —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with     —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,     C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted     with carboxyl, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵; -   R¹² represents hydrogen or C₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted with     C₁₋₄alkoxy; -   R¹³ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl or a saturated 4 to 6-membered     monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected     from N, O or S, wherein said C₃₋₈cycloalkyl or monocyclic     heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 substituents     each independently selected from halogen, hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl,     haloC₁₋₆alkyl, ═O, cyano, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, or —NR¹⁴R¹⁵; -   R¹⁴ and R¹⁵ each independently represent hydrogen, or haloC₁₋₄alkyl,     or C₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted with a substituent selected from     hydroxyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, amino or mono- or di(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino; -   R¹⁶ represents hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy,     —NR¹⁴R¹⁵ or —C(═O)NR¹⁴R¹⁵; -   n independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4;     the N-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof     or the solvates thereof.

WO2006/092430, WO2008/003702, WO01/68047, WO2005/007099, WO2004/098494, WO2009/141386, WO 2004/030635, WO 2008/141065, WO 2011/026579, WO 2011/028947, WO 2007/003419, WO 00/42026, WO2011/135376, WO2012/073017, WO2013/061074, WO2013/061081, WO2013/061077 and WO2013/061080 which each disclose a series of heterocyclyl derivatives.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

Unless the context indicates otherwise, references to formula (I) in all sections of this document (including the uses, methods and other aspects of the invention) include references to all other sub-formula (e.g. Ia), sub-groups, preferences, embodiments and examples as defined herein.

The prefix “C_(x-y)” (where x and y are integers) as used herein refers to the number of carbon atoms in a given group. Thus, a C₁₋₆alkyl group contains from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a C₃₋₆cycloalkyl group contains from 3 to 6 carbon atoms, a C₁₋₄alkoxy group contains from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and so on.

The term ‘halo’ or ‘halogen’ as used herein refers to a fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine atom.

The term ‘C₁₋₄alkyl’, or ‘C₁₋₆alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched saturated hydrocarbon group containing from 1 to 4 or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of such groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl or hexyl and the like.

The term ‘C₂₋₄alkenyl’ or ‘C₂₋₆alkenyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon group containing from 2 to 4 or 2 to 6 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon double bond.

The term ‘C₂₋₄alkynyl’ or ‘C₂₋₆alkynyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 4 or 2 to 6 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon triple bond.

The term ‘C₁₋₄alkoxy’ or ‘C₁₋₆alkoxy’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to an —O—C₁₋₄alkyl group or an —O—C₁₋₆alkyl group wherein C₁₋₄alkyl and C₁₋₆alkyl are as defined herein. Examples of such groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, and the like.

The term ‘C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C₁₋₄alkyl group or a C₁₋₆alkyl-O—C₁₋₆alkyl group wherein C₁₋₄alkyl and C₁₋₆alkyl are as defined herein. Examples of such groups include methoxyethyl, ethoxyethyl, propoxymethyl, butoxypropyl, and the like.

The term ‘C₃₋₈cycloalkyl’ as used herein refers to a saturated monocyclic hydrocarbon ring of 3 to 8 carbon atoms. Examples of such groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl or cyclooctyl and the like.

The term ‘C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl’ as used herein refers to a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring of 3 to 8 carbon atoms having a carbon carbon double bond.

The term ‘hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group. The terms ‘hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl’ therefore include monohydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, monohydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl and also polyhydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl and polyhydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms replaced with a hydroxyl group, so the hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl or hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl may have one, two, three or more hydroxyl groups. Examples of such groups include hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl and the like.

The term ‘haloC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘haloC₁₋₆alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term ‘haloC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘haloC₁₋₆alkyl’ therefore include monohaloC₁₋₄alkyl, monohaloC₁₋₆alkyl and also polyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl and polyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms replaced with a halogen, so the haloC₁₋₄alkyl or haloC₁₋₆alkyl may have one, two, three or more halogens. Examples of such groups include fluoroethyl, fluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl or trifluoroethyl and the like.

The term ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl’ therefore refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl group wherein one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen.

The term ‘hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy’ or ‘hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to an —O—C₁₋₄alkyl group or an —O—C₁₋₆alkyl group wherein the C₁₋₄alkyl and C₁₋₆alkyl group is as defined above and one or more than one hydrogen atom of the C₁₋₄alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl group is replaced with a hydroxyl group. The term ‘hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy’ or ‘hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy’ therefore include monohydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, monohydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy and also polyhydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy and polyhydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms replaced with a hydroxyl group so the hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy or hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy may have one, two, three or more hydroxyl groups. Examples of such groups include hydroxymethoxy, hydroxyethoxy, hydroxypropoxy and the like.

The term ‘haloC₁₋₄alkoxy’ or ‘haloC₁₋₆alkoxy’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a —O—C₁₋₄alkyl group or a —O—C₁₋₆ alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The terms ‘haloC₁₋₄alkoxy’ or ‘haloC₁₋₆alkoxy’ therefore include monohaloC₁₋₄alkoxy, monohaloC₁₋₆alkoxy and also polyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy and polyhaloC₁₋₆alkoxy. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms replaced with a halogen, so the haloC₁₋₄alkoxy or haloC₁₋₆alkoxy may have one, two, three or more halogens. Examples of such groups include fluoroethyloxy, difluoromethoxy or trifluoromethoxy and the like.

The term ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to an —O—C₁₋₄alkyl group wherein the C₁₋₄alkyl group is as defined herein and wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy’ therefore refers to a —O—C₁₋₄alkyl group wherein one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen.

The term ‘haloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C₁₋₄alkyl group wherein C₁₋₄alkyl is as defined herein and wherein in one or both of the C₁₋₄alkyl groups one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term ‘haloC₁₋₄ alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ therefore refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C₁₋₄alkyl group wherein in one or both of the C₁₋₄alkyl groups one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen and wherein C₁₋₄ alkyl is as defined herein. Preferably, in one of the C₁₋₄alkyl groups one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. Preferably, haloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl means C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with haloC₁₋₄alkoxy.

The term ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ as used herein refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C₁₋₄alkyl group wherein C₁₋₄alkyl is as defined herein and wherein in one or both of the C₁₋₄alkyl groups one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The terms ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ therefore refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C₁₋₄alkyl group wherein in one or both of the C₁₋₄alkyl groups one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen and wherein C₁₋₄alkyl is as defined herein.

The term ‘hydroxyC₂₋₆alkenyl’ as used herein refers to a C₂₋₆alkenyl group wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and wherein C₂₋₆alkenyl is as defined herein.

The term ‘hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl’ as used herein refers to a C₂₋₆alkynyl group wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and wherein C₂₋₆alkynyl is as defined herein.

The term phenylC₁₋₆alkyl as used herein refers to a C₁₋₆alkyl group as defined herein which is substituted with one phenyl group.

The term cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl or cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl as used herein refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl group as defined herein which is substituted with one cyano group.

The term “heterocyclyl” as used herein shall, unless the context indicates otherwise, include both aromatic and non-aromatic ring systems. Thus, for example, the term “heterocyclyl group” includes within its scope aromatic, non-aromatic, unsaturated, partially saturated and fully saturated heterocyclyl ring systems. In general, unless the context indicates otherwise, such groups may be monocyclic or bicyclic and may contain, for example, 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members. Reference to 4 to 7 ring members include 4, 5, 6 or 7 atoms in the ring and reference to 4 to 6 ring members include 4, 5, or 6 atoms in the ring. Examples of monocyclic groups are groups containing 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 ring members, more usually 3 to 7, and preferably 5, 6 or 7 ring members, more preferably 5 or 6 ring members. Examples of bicyclic groups are those containing 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12 ring members, and more usually 9 or 10 ring members. Where reference is made herein to heterocyclyl groups, the heterocyclyl ring can, unless the context indicates otherwise, be optionally substituted (i.e. unsubstituted or substituted) by one or more substituents as discussed herein.

The heterocyclyl groups can be heteroaryl groups having from 5 to 12 ring members, more usually from 5 to 10 ring members. The term “heteroaryl” is used herein to denote a heterocyclyl group having aromatic character. The term “heteroaryl” embraces polycyclic (e.g. bicyclic) ring systems wherein one or more rings are non-aromatic, provided that at least one ring is aromatic. In such polycyclic systems, the group may be attached by the aromatic ring, or by a non-aromatic ring.

Examples of heteroaryl groups are monocyclic and bicyclic groups containing from five to twelve ring members, and more usually from five to ten ring members. The heteroaryl group can be, for example, a five membered or six membered monocyclic ring or a bicyclic structure formed from fused five and six membered rings or two fused six membered rings, or two fused five membered rings. Each ring may contain up to about five heteroatoms typically selected from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen. Typically the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 4 heteroatoms, more typically up to 3 heteroatoms, more usually up to 2, for example a single heteroatom. In one embodiment, the heteroaryl ring contains at least one ring nitrogen atom. The nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl rings can be basic, as in the case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentially non-basic as in the case of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen. In general the number of basic nitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group, including any amino group substituents of the ring, will be less than five.

Examples of five membered heteroaryl groups include but are not limited to pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, furazan, oxazole, oxadiazole, oxatriazole, isoxazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, isothiazole, pyrazole, triazole and tetrazole groups.

Examples of six membered heteroaryl groups include but are not limited to pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine and triazine.

A bicyclic heteroaryl group may be, for example, a group selected from:

-   -   a) a benzene ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1,         2 or 3 ring heteroatoms;     -   b) a pyridine ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing         0, 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms;     -   c) a pyrimidine ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing         0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;     -   d) a pyrrole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0,         1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms;     -   e) a pyrazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing         0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;     -   f) an imidazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing         0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;     -   g) an oxazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing         0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;     -   h) an isoxazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing         0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;     -   i) a thiazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing         0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;     -   j) an isothiazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring         containing 0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;     -   k) a thiophene ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing         0, 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms;     -   l) a furan ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0,         1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms;     -   m) a cyclohexyl ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing         1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms; and     -   n) a cyclopentyl ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring         containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms.

Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a five membered ring fused to another five membered ring include but are not limited to imidazothiazole (e.g. imidazo[2,1-b]thiazole) and imidazoimidazole (e.g. imidazo[1,2-a]imidazole).

Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a six membered ring fused to a five membered ring include but are not limited to benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, isobenzoxazole, benzisoxazole, benzthiazole, benzisothiazole, isobenzofuran, indole, isoindole, indolizine, indoline, isoindoline, purine (e.g., adenine, guanine), indazole, pyrazolopyrimidine (e.g. pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidine), triazolopyrimidine (e.g. [1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidine), benzodioxole, imidazopyridine and pyrazolopyridine (e.g. pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyridine) groups.

Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing two fused six membered rings include but are not limited to quinoline, isoquinoline, chroman, thiochroman, chromene, isochromene, chroman, isochroman, benzodioxan, quinolizine, benzoxazine, benzodiazine, pyridopyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine and pteridine groups.

Examples of polycyclic heteroaryl groups containing an aromatic ring and a non-aromatic ring include, tetrahydroisoquinoline, tetrahydroquinoline, dihydrobenzthiene, dihydrobenzfuran, 2,3-dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxine, benzo[1,3]dioxole, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydrobenzofuran, tetrahydrotriazolopyrazine (e.g. 5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine), indoline and indane groups.

A nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring must contain at least one ring nitrogen atom. Each ring may, in addition, contain up to about four other heteroatoms typically selected from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen. Typically the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 3 heteroatoms, for example 1, 2 or 3, more usually up to 2 nitrogens, for example a single nitrogen. The nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl rings can be basic, as in the case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentially non-basic as in the case of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen. In general the number of basic nitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group, including any amino group substituents of the ring, will be less than five.

Examples of nitrogen-containing heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxatriazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, furazanyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, triazolyl (e.g., 1,2,3-triazolyl, 1,2,4-triazolyl), tetrazolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, benzthiazolyl and benzisothiazole, indolyl, 3H-indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, isoindolinyl, purinyl (e.g., adenine [6-aminopurine], guanine [2-amino-6-hydroxypurine]), indazolyl, quinolizinyl, benzoxazinyl, benzodiazinyl, pyridopyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl and pteridinyl.

Examples of nitrogen-containing polycyclic heteroaryl groups containing an aromatic ring and a non-aromatic ring include tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, and indolinyl.

The term “non-aromatic group” embraces, unless the context indicates otherwise, unsaturated ring systems without aromatic character, partially saturated and fully saturated heterocyclyl ring systems. The terms “unsaturated” and “partially saturated” refer to rings wherein the ring structure(s) contains atoms sharing more than one valence bond i.e. the ring contains at least one multiple bond e.g. a C═C, C≡C or N═C bond. The term “fully saturated” refers to rings where there are no multiple bonds between ring atoms. Saturated heterocyclyl groups include piperidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, piperazine. Partially saturated heterocyclyl groups include pyrazolines, for example 2-pyrazoline and 3-pyrazoline.

Examples of non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups are groups having from 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members. Such groups can be monocyclic or bicyclic, for example, and typically have from 1 to 5 heteroatom ring members (more usually 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatom ring members), usually selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulphur. The heterocyclyl groups can contain, for example, cyclic ether moieties (e.g. as in tetrahydrofuran and dioxane), cyclic thioether moieties (e.g. as in tetrahydrothiophene and dithiane), cyclic amine moieties (e.g. as in pyrrolidine), cyclic amide moieties (e.g. as in pyrrolidone), cyclic thioamides, cyclic thioesters, cyclic ureas (e.g. as in imidazolidin-2-one) cyclic ester moieties (e.g. as in butyrolactone), cyclic sulphones (e.g. as in sulpholane and sulpholene), cyclic sulphoxides, cyclic sulphonamides and combinations thereof (e.g. thiomorpholine).

Particular examples include morpholine, piperidine (e.g. 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), piperidone, pyrrolidine (e.g. 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl), pyrrolidone, azetidine, pyran (2H-pyran or 4H-pyran), dihydrothiophene, dihydropyran, dihydrofuran, dihydrothiazole, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, dioxane, tetrahydropyran (e.g. 4-tetrahydro pyranyl), imidazoline, imidazolidinone, oxazoline, thiazoline, 2-pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazone, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine. In general, preferred non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups include saturated groups such as piperidine, pyrrolidine, azetidine, morpholine, piperazine and N-alkyl piperazines.

In a nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclyl ring the ring must contain at least one ring nitrogen atom. The heterocylic groups can contain, for example cyclic amine moieties (e.g. as in pyrrolidine), cyclic amides (such as a pyrrolidinone, piperidone or caprolactam), cyclic sulphonamides (such as an isothiazolidine 1,1-dioxide, [1,2]thiazinane 1,1-dioxide or [1,2]thiazepane 1,1-dioxide) and combinations thereof. Particular examples of nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups include aziridine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, piperidine (e.g. 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), pyrrolidine (e.g. 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl), pyrrolidone, dihydrothiazole, imidazoline, imidazolidinone, oxazoline, thiazoline, 6H-1,2,5-thiadiazine, 2-pyrazoline, 3-pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine.

The heterocyclyl groups can be polycyclic fused ring systems or bridged ring systems such as the oxa- and aza analogues of bicycloalkanes, tricycloalkanes (e.g. adamantane and oxa-adamantane). For an explanation of the distinction between fused and bridged ring systems, see Advanced Organic Chemistry, by Jerry March, 4^(th) Edition, Wiley Interscience, pages 131-133, 1992.

The heterocyclyl groups can each be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituent groups. For example, heterocyclyl groups can be unsubstituted or substituted by 1, 2, 3 or 4 substituents. Where the heterocyclyl group is monocyclic or bicyclic, typically it is unsubstituted or has 1, 2 or 3 substituents.

The term “carbocyclyl” as used herein shall, unless the context indicates otherwise, include both aromatic and non-aromatic ring systems. Thus, for example, the term “carbocyclyl group” includes within its scope aromatic, non-aromatic, unsaturated, partially saturated and fully saturated carbocyclyl ring systems. In general, unless the context indicates otherwise, such groups may be monocyclic or bicyclic and may contain, for example, 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members. Reference to 4 to 7 ring members include 4, 5, 6 or 7 atoms in the ring and reference to 4 to 6 ring members include 4, 5, or 6 atoms in the ring. Examples of monocyclic groups are groups containing 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 ring members, more usually 3 to 7, and preferably 5, 6 or 7 ring members, more preferably 5 or 6 ring members. Examples of bicyclic groups are those containing 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12 ring members, and more usually 9 or 10 ring members. Where reference is made herein to carbocyclyl groups, the carbocyclyl ring can, unless the context indicates otherwise, be optionally substituted (i.e. unsubstituted or substituted) by one or more substituents as discussed herein.

The term carbocyclyl comprises aryl, C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl.

The term aryl as used herein refers to carbocyclyl aromatic groups including phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl groups.

Whenever used hereinbefore or hereinafter that substituents can be selected each independently out of a list of numerous definitions, all possible combinations are intended which are chemically possible. Whenever used hereinbefore or hereinafter that a particular substituent is further substituted with two or more groups, such as for example hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy, all possible combinations are intended which are chemically possible.

In one embodiment, D represents an aromatic ring.

In one embodiment, D represents a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents an aromatic 3 to 12, in particular an aromatic 5 to 12, ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or an aromatic 3 to 12, in particular an aromatic 5 to 12, ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents an aromatic 3 to 12 (e.g. 5 to 10) ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl, wherein said carbocyclyl may be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents phenyl or naphthyl, wherein said phenyl or naphthyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents an aromatic 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl group may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents a 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents an aromatic 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents a 5 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents a 5 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents pyrazolyl (e.g. pyrazol-4yl), wherein said pyrazolyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents a 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents a 6 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents a 12 ring membered bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, D represents a 12 ring membered bicyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment D represents

wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; and each R^(1a) is independently selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with amino or mono- or di(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino or —NH(C₃₋₈cycloalkyl), cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, and C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with one or more fluoro atoms. In one embodiment R^(1a) is independently selected from hydrogen and C₁₋₄alkyl. In one embodiment R^(1a) is hydrogen.

In one embodiment, D represents

wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂.

In one embodiment, W is —N(R³)—.

In one embodiment, W is —C(R^(3a)R^(3b))—.

In one embodiment, D is other than pyrazolyl, in particular D is pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, pyrimidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted.

Said optional substituents may represent halo, cyano, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, —NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵, —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl-NR⁴R⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶.

In one embodiment, D is optionally substituted 4-pyrazolyl. In one embodiment, D is 4-pyrazolyl substituted at the 1 position with C₁₋₆alkyl for example methyl.

In one embodiment, D is 1-pyrazolyl or 2-pyrazolyl, both may optionally be substituted.

In one embodiment, D is optionally substituted pyrazolyl.

In one embodiment, D is other than pyrazolyl, in particular D is pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, pyrimidinyl, said rings being optionally substituted.

In one embodiment, D is optionally substituted phenyl.

In one embodiment, D is phenyl.

In one embodiment, D is phenyl or optionally substituted pyrazolyl.

In one embodiment R¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂.

In one embodiment R¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃.

In one embodiment R¹ represents hydrogen.

In one embodiment R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl. In one embodiment R¹ represents methyl.

In one embodiment each R² is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, haloC₁₋₄alkyl, haloC₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with NR⁷R⁸, —NR⁷R⁸ and —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸; or when two R² groups are attached to adjacent carbon atoms they may be taken together to form a radical of formula —O—(C(R¹⁷)₂)_(p)—O— wherein R¹⁷ represents hydrogen or fluorine and p represents 1 or 2.

In one embodiment each R² is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, haloC₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with NR⁷R⁸, —NR⁷R⁸ or —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸.

In one embodiment one or more R² represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—, or halo, for example fluoro.

In one embodiment one or more R² represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—.

In one embodiment n is equal to 0. In one embodiment n is equal to 1. In one embodiment n is equal to 2. In one embodiment n is equal to 3. In one embodiment n is equal to 4.

In one embodiment, n is equal to 2, 3 or 4.

In one embodiment n is equal to 2 and one R² is present at the 3-position and the other is present at the 5-position.

In one embodiment n is equal to 2 and one R² is present at the 3-position and the other is present at the 5-position and each R² represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example each R² represents CH₃O—.

In one embodiment n is equal to 3 and one R² is present at the 2-position, one R² is present at the 3-position and one R² is present at the 5-position.

In one embodiment n is equal to 3 and one R² is present at the 3-position and represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—; one R² is present at the 5-position and represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—; one R² is present at the 2-position and represents halogen, for example fluoro.

In one embodiment n is equal to 4 and one R² is present at the 2-position, one R² is present at the 3-position, one R² is present at the 5-position and one R² is present at the 6-position.

In one embodiment n is equal to 4 and one R² is present at the 3-position and represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—; one R² is present at the 5-position and represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—; one R² is present at the 2-position and represents halogen, for example fluoro, and one R² is present at the 6-position and represents halogen, for example fluoro.

In one embodiment, R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted (e.g. substituted) with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ and optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₂₋₆ alkenyl substituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)— or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂.

In one embodiment, R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted (e.g. substituted) with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ and optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with R⁹, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkenyl, R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)— or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, R¹³ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halo atoms and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ and substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyloxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, R¹³, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂.

In one embodiment, R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl or R¹³.

In one embodiment, R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkenyl or R¹³.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹; R¹⁰ and R¹¹ each independently represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, or C₂₋₆alkynyl.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, or C₂₋₆alkynyl.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, or C₂₋₆alkynyl.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. C₁₋₄alkyl) substituted with R⁹.

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. C₁₋₄alkyl) substituted with R⁹, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted saturated or an aromatic 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example optionally substituted isoxazolidinyl, pyrimidinyl, imidazolyl or pyrrolidinyl, in particular optionally substituted imidazolyl (e.g. imidazol-2-yl). In one embodiment, imidazolyl is substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵ (e.g. —S(═O)₂—N(CH₃)₂. In one embodiment, R⁹ represents unsubstituted imidazolyl (e.g. imidazol-2-yl).

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. C₁₋₄alkyl) substituted with R⁹, wherein R⁹ represents an optionally substituted aromatic 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one or two nitrogen heteroatom, for example pyrimidinyl or pyridinyl.

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. C₁₋₄alkyl) substituted with R⁹. R⁹ represents an optionally substituted saturated 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example optionally substituted isoxazolidinyl or pyrrolidinyl, in particular optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl. In one embodiment the pyrrolidinyl is substituted with oxo. In one embodiment the pyrrolidinyl substituted with oxo is pyrrolidin-2-yl substituted with oxo.

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. methyl or n-propyl) substituted with R⁹, R⁹ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, for example cyclopropyl.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl, halo and/or —NR¹⁰R¹¹. In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl, halo or —NR¹⁰R¹¹, wherein the C₁₋₆alkyl group is a straight chain alkyl group e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl. In a further embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl or halo.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl. R³ may represent —CH₂CH₂OH or —CH₂CH₂CH₂OH.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, for example R³ may represent —CH₂CHOHCF₃.

In one embodiment R³ represents haloC₁₋₆alkyl, for example R³ may represent —CH₂CH₂CH₂Cl.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹. In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₄alkyl substituted —NR¹⁰R¹¹, wherein the C₁₋₄alkyl group is a straight chain alkyl group e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl. In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, wherein the C₁₋₄alkyl group is an ethylene group (—CH₂CH₂—).

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl) substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, wherein R¹⁰ and R¹¹ are independently selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl and haloC₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. hydrogen, iso-propyl or —CH₂CF₃).

R^(3a) may represent —NR¹⁰R¹¹, hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, R¹³ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—.

In one embodiment R^(3a) is —NR¹⁰R¹¹, hydroxyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹.

In one embodiment R^(3a) is hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹.

In one embodiment R^(3a) is C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹.

In one embodiment R^(3a) is C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, for example —CH₂—C(═O)—O—CH₃.

In one embodiment R^(3a) represents hydroxyl.

In one embodiment R^(3b) represents hydrogen.

In one embodiment R^(3b) represents hydroxyl.

In one embodiment R^(3a) represents hydroxyl and R^(3b) represents hydrogen.

In one embodiment R^(3a) and R^(3b) are taken together to form ═O, to form ═NR¹⁰, to form cyclopropyl together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, to form ═CH—C₀₋₄alkyl substituted with R^(3c), or to form

wherein ring A is a monocyclic 5 to 7 membered saturated heterocycle containing one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heteroatom not being positioned in alpha position of the double bond, wherein ring A is optionally being substituted with cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, H₂N—C₁₋₄alkyl, (C₁₋₄alkyl)NH—C₁₋₄alkyl, (C₁₋₄alkyl)₂N—C₁₋₄alkyl, (haloC₁₋₄alkyl)NH—C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, —C(═O)—NH₂, —C(═O)—NH(C₁₋₄alkyl), —C(═O)—N(C₁₋₄alkyl)₂.

In one embodiment R^(3a) and R^(3b) are taken together to form ═O, to form cyclopropyl together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, to form ═CH—C₀₋₄alkyl substituted with R^(3c), or to form

wherein ring A is a monocyclic 5 to 7 membered saturated heterocycle containing one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heteroatom not being positioned in alpha position of the double bond.

In one embodiment R^(3a) and R^(3b) are taken together to form ═O.

In one embodiment R^(3a) and R^(3b) are taken together to form cyclopropyl together with the carbon atom to which they are attached.

In one embodiment R^(3a) and R^(3b) are taken together to form ═CH—C₀₋₄alkyl substituted with R^(3c), for example ═CH—CH₂—R^(3c) or ═CH—R^(3c).

In one embodiment R^(3c) represents hydrogen.

In one embodiment R^(3c) represents hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, R⁹, —NR¹⁰R¹¹, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, cyano, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl or —CH(OH)—C₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment R^(3c) represents hydroxyl, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —NR¹⁰R¹¹, cyano, or —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment R^(3a) and R^(3b) are taken together to form ═CH—C₀₋₄alkyl (for example for example ═CH—CH₂— or ═CH—) substituted with R^(3c) wherein R^(3c) represents hydroxyl or —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, for example —C(═O)NH(CH₃).

In one embodiment R^(3a) and R^(3b) are taken together to form ═CH—C₁₋₄alkyl in the Z configuration.

In one embodiment R^(3a) and R^(3b) are taken together to form ═CH—C₁₋₄alkyl in the E configuration.

In one embodiment, R⁹ is selected from:

-   an optionally substituted C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, -   an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic     heterocyclyl, -   an optionally substituted saturated 6 membered monocyclic     heterocyclyl, -   a saturated or an aromatic 3, 4, 5 or 6 membered monocyclic     heterocyclyl containing one or two oxygen heteroatoms, -   an optionally substituted 4 membered heterocyclyl containing one     oxygen heteroatom, -   an optionally substituted aromatic 6 membered monocyclic heterocycle     containing one or two nitrogen heteroatoms, -   a partially saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing     one nitrogen heteroatom which may optionally be substituted, -   an optionally substituted saturated 4 membered monocyclic     heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen heteroatom, -   a saturated 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one     nitrogen heteroatom, -   a saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one     nitrogen heteroatom, -   a bicyclic heterocyclyl containing a benzene ring fused to a 5- or     6-membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms, -   a 4, 5 or 6 membered monocyclic saturated heterocycle substituted     with two substituents which are attached to the same atom and which     are taken together to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic     heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O     or S, -   an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic     heterocyclyl containing one sulphur heteroatom, -   an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic     heterocyclyl containing one sulphur and one nitrogen heteroatom, -   a saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing two     nitrogen heteroatoms, -   an aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing four     nitrogen heteroatoms, -   an aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one oxygen     and two nitrogen heteroatoms, -   an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic     heterocyclyl containing two nitrogen heteroatoms, -   an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic     heterocyclyl containing three nitrogen heteroatoms, -   a saturated 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one     nitrogen and one oxygen heteroatom, -   a saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one     nitrogen and one sulphur heteroatom, -   a saturated 7 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing two     nitrogen heteroatoms, -   a saturated 7 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one     nitrogen and one oxygen heteroatom, and -   phenyl or naphthyl, in particular phenyl.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, pyrolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl. Optional substituents may represent ═O, a 5 or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S wherein said heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R¹⁶; or —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents C₃₋₆cycloalkyl, such as for example cyclopropyl, a 3 membered saturated heterocyclyl, such as for example oxiranyl, an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyrolidinonyl, an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, piperazinyl, or morpholinyl, an optionally substituted bicyclic heterocycle, such as for example 1H-isoindol-1,3-dione. Optional substituents may represent ═O, C₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, or C₁₋₄alkyl-C(═O)—.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, or an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example pyridyl, pyrimidinyl or pyrazinyl. Optional substituents may represent C₁₋₄alkoxy or —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl. Optional substituents may represent —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example pyridinyl or pyrimidinyl. Optional substituents may represent C₁₋₄alkoxy.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, pyrolidinyl, oxazolidinyl. Optional substituents may represent ═O, a 5 or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S wherein said heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R¹⁶; or —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents C₃₋₆cycloalkyl, such as for example cyclopropyl, a 3 membered saturated heterocyclyl, such as for example oxiranyl, an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyrolidinonyl, an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, piperazinyl, or morpholinyl, an optionally substituted bicyclic heterocycle, such as for example 1H-isoindol-1,3-dione. Optional substituents may represent ═O, C₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵ hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, or C₁₋₄alkyl-C(═O)—.

In one embodiment R¹⁰ represents hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment R¹⁰ is hydrogen.

In one embodiment R¹¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)-hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)—R⁶, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, R⁶, —C(═O)—R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, —C(═O)-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkoxy, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, carboxyl, or C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment R¹⁰ and R¹¹ represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment, R⁶ represents a 6-membered monocyclic saturated heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted. For example piperazinyl or morpholinyl or tetrahydropyranyl, optionally substituted with halogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, or C₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—.

In one embodiment, R⁶ represents a 6-membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted. For example pyridinyl, optionally substituted with halogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, or C₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—.

In one embodiment R⁶ represents an optionally substituted saturated 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, such as for example tetrahydropyran.

In one embodiment, R¹² represents hydrogen or C₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₄alkyloxy.

In one embodiment, R¹³ represents a saturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N or O.

In one embodiment, R¹⁴ and R¹⁵ each independently represent hydrogen or C₁₋₄alkyl.

In one embodiment, W is —N(R³)—, D is a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl, wherein said carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups; n is 2 or 4; R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy or halo; R³ is hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹.

In one embodiment, W is —N(R³)—, D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl; n is 2 or 4; R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy or halo; R³ is hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹.

In one embodiment, W is —N(R³)—, D is a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl, wherein said carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups; n is 2, 3 or 4; R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy or halo; R³ is hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹; R¹⁰ and R¹¹ each independently represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment, W is —N(R³)—, D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl; n is 2, 3 or 4; R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy or halo; R³ is hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹; R¹⁰ and R¹¹ each independently represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment, W is —N(R³)—, D is a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl, wherein said carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups, in particular D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl, more in particular D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl, and n is 2 or 4; even more in particular D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl; n is 2 or 4, R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy or halo; even further in particular D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl; n is 2 or 4; R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy or halo, and said R² is placed in position 2, 3, 5 or 6; even further in particular D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl; n is 2; R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy and said R² is placed in position 3 or 5; and R³ is hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹.

In one embodiment, W is —C(R^(3a)R^(3b))—, D is a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl, wherein said carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups; n is 2 or 4; R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy or halo; R³ is hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹.

In one embodiment, W is —C(R^(3a)R^(3b))—, D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl; n is 2 or 4; R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy or halo; R³ is hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹.

In one embodiment, W is —C(R^(3a)R^(3b))—, D is a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl, wherein said carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups; in particular D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl, more in particular D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl and n is 2 or 4; even more in particular D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl; n is 2 or 4; R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy or halo; even further in particular D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl; n is 2 or 4; R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy and said R² is placed in position 2, 3, 5 or 6; even further in particular D is phenyl, or pyrazolyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl; n is 2 or 4; R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy and said R² is placed in position 2, 3, 5 or 6; and R³ is hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹.

In one embodiment, n represents an integer equal to 2 or 4; R² represents C₁₋₄alkoxy or halogen, for example CH₃O— or fluoro; R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, D represents pyrazolyl, in particular pyrazol-4-yl substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl; W is —N(R³)—.

In one embodiment the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (Ia) including any tautomeric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof:

wherein n, R¹, R² and R³ are as defined herein; the N-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the solvates thereof.

A compound of formula (Ia) including any tautomeric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof wherein:

-   R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl; -   R² represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—, or halo, for example     fluoro; -   n=2 or 4; and -   R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl     substituted with R⁹;     the N-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof     or the solvates thereof.

In one embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is any one of the following compounds

a N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.

In one embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is any one of the following compounds

a N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.

For the avoidance of doubt, it is to be understood that each general and specific preference, embodiment and example for one substituent may be combined, whenever possible, with each general and specific preference, embodiment and example for one or more, preferably, all other substituents as defined herein and that all such embodiments are embraced by this application.

Methods for the Preparation of Compounds of Formula (I)

In this section, as in all other sections of this application unless the context indicates otherwise, references to formula (I) also include all other sub-groups and examples thereof as defined herein.

In general, compounds of formula (I) wherein W is —N(R³)—, said compounds being represented by formula (Ib), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1.

In Scheme 1, the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium     hydride or Cs₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, tetrahydrofuran or     acetonitrile and wherein W₁ represents a suitable leaving group,     such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, chloro and the like, or     —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃, and R^(3d) represents optionally substituted     C₁₋₆alkyl, such as for example —CH₂—C₃H₅; -   2: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium     hydride, Cs₂CO₃, or potassium hydroxide, and a suitable solvent,     such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide or     acetonitrile and wherein R′ represents optionally substituted     C₁₋₄alkyl and R″ represents hydrogen or optionally substituted     C₁₋₄alkyl; -   3: in the presence of a suitable phase transfer reagent such as for     example tetrabutylammonium bromide, a suitable base such as for     example potassium hydroxide, and a suitable solvent such as for     example 2-methyltetrahydrofuran and water. When, an intermediate of     formula (II) is reacting with an intermediate of formula     W₁—C₁₋₆alkyl-Ncycle; the following conditions can be applied: a     suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable     solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or     N,N-dimethylacetamide. -   4: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium     hydride, and a suitable solvent, e.g. N,N-dimethylformamide or     N,N-dimethylacetamide, and wherein wherein P represents a suitable     protective group, such as for example —C(═O)—O—C(CH₃)₃; -   5: in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCl or     trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     dichloromethane or an alcohol, e.g. methanol; -   6: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium     hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     N,N-dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide or tetrahydrofuran,     and wherein W₂ represents a suitable leaving group, such as for     example halo, e.g. bromo and wherein R^(x) and R^(y) represent     C₁₋₄alkyl, and R^(z) represent C₁₋₄alkyl or phenyl, for instance     R^(x) and R^(y) represent CH₃ and R^(z) represents C(CH₃)₃ or     phenyl; -   7: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran. This type of reaction can also be performed in the     presence of a suitable acid, such as for example acetic acid or HCl,     and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane; -   8: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium     hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     N,N-dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide and wherein W₃     represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g.     bromo and the like; -   9: in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCl, and     a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol or     isopropanol; -   10: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example     triethylamine or diisopropylethanamine, and a suitable solvent, such     as for example dichloromethane or tetrahydrofuran. In particular,     this type of reaction is used to prepare intermediates of     formula (VI) wherein C₁₋₆alkyl represents C₃₋₆alkyl. For some     variants of intermediates of formula (VI) e.g. wherein C₁₋₆alkyl     represents C₁₋₂alkyl it might be preferred to perform the reaction     in non basic conditions. -   11: optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for     example triethylamine, K₂CO₃, Na₂CO₃ or sodium hydride, and     optionally a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile,     tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, N,N-dimethylformamide,     1-methyl-pyrrolidinone. This type of reaction can also be performed     with a suitable salt of NHR¹⁰R¹¹, e.g. HCl salt of NHR¹⁰R¹¹, or may     be performed in the presence of potassium iodide. In this way     compounds wherein R³ represents iodoC₁₋₆alkyl can be obtained. -   12: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example     acetonitrile, 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, optionally in the presence     of potassium iodide or a suitable base, such as for example Na₂CO₃,     K₂CO₃ or triethylamine. This reaction can also be performed with a     suitable salt of

which is a suitable nitrogen containing ring (unsubstituted or substituted) within the definition of R⁹

-   13: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium     hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     dimethylacetamide and wherein P represents a suitable protective     group, such as for example —C(═O)—O—C(CH₃)₃.

Intermediates of formula (II) used in the above Scheme 1 can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 2.

In Scheme 2, the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1: can be performed as depicted, no solvent required; -   2: in the presence of H₂, a suitable catalyst, such as for example     Raney Nickel, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran or an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like; or     alternatively in the presence of H₂, a suitable catalyst, such as     for example Pd/C, and a suitable solvent or a mixture of solvents,     such as for example tetrahydrofuran/methanol; -   3: in suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide,     acetonitrile, dioxane and water or a mixture of toluene, water and     methanol, optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for     example N,N-diisopropylethylamine or K₂CO₃ or NaHCO₃.

In general, compounds of formula (I) wherein W is —C(R^(3a)R^(3b))—, said compounds being represented by formula (Ic-1), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 3.

In Scheme 3, the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1: in the presence of a suitable methylating agent, such as for     example MeMgBr, trimethylboroxine or nBu₃SnMe; a suitable catalyst,     such as for example Pd(PPh₃)₄ or PdCl₂(dppf).CH₂Cl₂; a suitable     solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or     tetrahydrofuran or dioxane and water; and optionally a suitable     base, such as for example K₂CO₃; -   2: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example     N,N-dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, dioxane and water or a mixture     of toluene, water and methanol, optionally in the presence of a     suitable base, such as for example N,N-diisopropylethylamine or     K₂CO₃ or NaHCO₃; -   3: in the presence of a suitable catalyst such as for example     Pd(PH₃)₄, a suitable base such as for example Na₂CO₃ and a suitable     solvent such as for example dioxane and water; -   4: in the presence of Cs₂CO₃, a suitable catalyst, such as for     example Pd(3,5,3′5′-OMe-dba)₂, a suitable ligand, such as for     example 9,9-dimethyl-4,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)xanthenes, and a     suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, and wherein W₄ is a     suitable leaving group, such as for example halogen, e.g. bromo; -   5: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example butyl     lithium, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran, and wherein W₁ represents a suitable leaving group,     such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, and R^(3d)     represents optionally substituted C₁₋₆alkyl. This reaction can also     be performed with a protected form of the reactant, namely     W₁—R^(3d)—P wherein P is a suitable protective group, such as for     example a tert-butyldimethylsilyl group followed by a suitable     deprotection reaction, such as in the presence of a suitable     desilylating reagent such as for example tetrabutylammonium     fluoride, in a suitable solvent such as for example     tetrahydrofurane, or such as in the presence of a suitable acid,     such as for example HCl or trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable     solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or     dichloromethane; -   6: first in the presence of zinc, lithium chloride, a catalytic     amount of dibromoethane in a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran, and subsequently in the presence of a suitable     catalyst, such as for example tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium     (Pd₂(dba)₃), and a suitable ligand, such as for example     2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,6′-di-i-propoxy-1,1′-biphenyl, in a     suitable solvent such as for example dioxane; -   7: in the presence of a suitable reducing agent, such as for example     LiAlH₄ or NaBH₄, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran; -   8: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example     triethylamine or diisopropylethanamine, and a suitable solvent, such     as for example dichloromethane or tetrahydrofuran; -   9: in a suitable solvent such as for example tetrahydrofuran; -   10: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example butyl     lithium, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran, and wherein W₅ represents a suitable leaving group,     such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein W is —C(R^(3a)R^(3b))—, said compounds being represented by formula (Ic-1), can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 4.

In Scheme 4, the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1, 2, 3: optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for     example triethylamine, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate or     sodium hydride, and optionally a suitable solvent, such as for     example acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide, a     suitable alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol and the like, and wherein P     represents a suitable protective group, such as for example     —C(═O)—OC(CH₃)₃. Step 1 can also be performed with a suitable salt     of

which is a suitable nitrogen containing ring (unsubstituted or substituted) within the definition of R⁹

-   4: in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCl or     trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     dichloromethane or an alcohol, e.g. methanol.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein W is —C(R^(3a)R^(3b))—, said compounds being represented by formula (Ic-1), (Id) or (Ie), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 5.

In Scheme 5, the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as a suitable     alcohol, e.g. methanol, and wherein the palladium catalyst is for     example Pd(OAc)₂ or PdCl₂ (dppf).CH₂Cl₂, and a suitable ligand, such     as for example 1,3-bis(diphenylphosphino)propane, and optionally in     the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium     acetate or triethylamine; -   2: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran; -   3: in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example     Pd(PPh₃)₄, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     N,N-dimethylformamide; -   4: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example     toluene and tetrahydrofuran -   5: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium     hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     N,N-dimethylformamide; -   6: in the presence of a suitable lewis acid, such as for example     trimethylaluminium, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     toluene; -   7: in the presence of a suitable solvent such as for example dioxane     or tetrahydrofuran; -   8: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran, and an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like; -   9: in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example     Pd(PPh₃)₄, and a suitable solvent, such as for example toluene; -   10: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein W is —C(R^(3a)R^(3b))—, said compounds being represented by formula (Ic-2) can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 6.

In Scheme 6, the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example     dioxane; -   2: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran; -   3: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium     hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     N,N-dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide, and wherein R^(x)     and R^(y) represents C₁₋₄alkyl, and wherein R^(z) represents     C₁₋₄alkyl or phenyl, for instance R^(x) and R^(y) represent CH₃ and     R^(z) represents C(CH₃)₃ or phenyl, and wherein W₂ represents a     suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo; -   4: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran.

Intermediates of formula (X) used in the above Scheme 3 and 5 can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 7.

In Scheme 7, the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1: in the presence of H₂, a suitable catalyst, such as for example     Raney nickel, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an     alcohol, such as for example methanol, or in the presence of tin     chloride dehydrate in a suitable solvent, such as for example ethyl     acetate; -   2: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example     N,N-dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, dioxane and water or a mixture     of toluene, water and methanol, optionally in the presence of a     suitable base, such as for example N,N-diisopropylethylamine or     K₂CO₃ or NaHCO₃.

Compounds of formula (Ib) wherein R³ represents optionally substituted C₂₋₆alkynyl, said compounds being represented by formula (Ib-2), can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 8.

In Scheme 8, the following reaction conditions apply:

in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide and wherein R^(3e) represents optionally substituted C₂₋₆alkynyl and W₆ represents a suitable leaving group such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, or —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃. The intermediate W₆—R^(3e) wherein W₆ represents —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃, can be prepared by reacting the corresponding alcohol derivative with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine or 4-dimethylaminopyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (Ib-2), wherein R^(3e) represents C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with hydroxyl, said compounds being represented by formula (Ib-2-1), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 9.

In Scheme 9, the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and     a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide; and     where R^(x), R^(y) and R^(z) are as defined hereinabove; -   2: in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example     trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     tetrahydrofuran. This reaction can also be performed with tetrabutyl     ammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent such as for     example tetrahydrofuran.

Alternatively, instead of an intermediate of formula (XXIV), halo-C₂₋₆alkynyl-O—Si(R^(x))(R^(y))(R^(z)) can also be used.

Compounds of formula (Ib-2), wherein R^(3e) represents C₂₋₆alkynyl, said compounds being represented by formula (Ib-2-2), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 10.

In Scheme 10, the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and     a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide, and     wherein W₇ is a suitable leaving group, such as for example halogen; -   2: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃,     and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g.     methanol and the like.

Compounds of formula (Ib), wherein R³ represents ethyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂, said compounds being represented by formula (Ib-1-7), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 11.

In Scheme 11, the following reaction conditions apply:

in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tri-N-butylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.

Intermediates of formula (IV′) wherein D is a ring moiety containing a nitrogen atom, as represented in Scheme 12, can be further reacted according to the following reaction Scheme 12.

In Scheme 12, the D′N moiety represents a -D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom), the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1: by reaction with W₈—C₁₋₆alkyl-halo wherein W₈ represents a     suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, in     the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a     suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide; -   2: by reaction with R⁶ in the presence of a suitable base, such as     for example K₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     acetonitrile; -   3: when in an intermediate of formula (IV′-c) the R⁶ carries a     hydroxyl group as in an intermediate of formula (IV′-c-1), then said     hydroxyl group can be protected by a suitable protective group P,     such as for example —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction with     C₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—W₉ wherein W₉ represents a suitable leaving group,     such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, in the presence of a suitable     base, such as for example triethylamine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine,     and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, -   4: by reaction with tetrabutylammonium fluoride in the presence of a     suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran; -   5: by reaction with methane sulfonyl chloride in the presence of a     suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable     solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, and wherein R^(u)     represents —SO₂CH₃; -   6: by reaction with an intermediate of formula NHR¹⁰R¹¹ in a     suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile; -   7: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃,     and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g.     methanol and the like. It is considered to be within the knowledge     of the person skilled in the art to recognize for which other D ring     moieties the described reactions also apply.

Intermediates of formula (IV′) and (XXXVIII) can also be reacted to prepare compounds of the present invention according to the reaction schemes as presented in Scheme 1. It is considered to be within the knowledge of the skilled person to recognize in which condition and for which definitions of R¹ on the D ring moiety a protective group may be appropriate for the reactions to be carried out. For instance, a hydroxyl group within the definition of R¹ may be protected with a tert. butyldimethylsilyl moiety; a NH group within the definition of R¹ may be protected with a —C(═O)—O—C(CH₃)₃ group.

It is also considered to be within the knowledge of the skilled person to recognize appropriate deprotection reactions.

Compounds of formula (Ib) wherein R³ is C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with 5-amino-1,3,4-oxadiazolyl can be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 13.

In Scheme 13, the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an     alcohol, e.g. ethanol; -   2: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaHCO₃,     and a suitable solvent, such as for example water or dioxane, and     wherein W₁₀ represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example     halo, e.g. bromo.

Compounds of formula (Ib) wherein R³ is C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with 3,3-dimethyl-morpholine can be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 14.

In Scheme 14, the following reaction conditions apply:

-   1: reaction with 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol in the presence of a     suitable base, such as for example NaH and in the presence of a     suitable solvent, such as for example N, N-dimethylformamide; -   2: reaction with for instance di-tert-butyl dicarbonate in the     presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, and a     suitable base, such as for example NaHCO₃, and wherein P is a     suitable protecting group P, such as for example —C(═O)—O—C(CH₃)₃; -   3: reaction with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a     suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, and a     suitable base, such as for example triethylamine; -   4: reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example     trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as     for example dichloromethane; -   5: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example     N,N-diisopropylethylamine and triethylamine, and a suitable solvent,     such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol.

It is considered to be within the knowledge of the person skilled in the art to recognize in which condition and on which part of the molecule a protective group may be appropriate. For instance, protective group on the R¹ substituent or on the D moiety, or protective group on the R³ substituent or on the R² substituent or combinations thereof. The skilled person is also considered to be able to recognize the most feasible protective group, such as for example —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₄alkyl or

or O—Si(CH₃)₂(C(CH₃)₃) or —CH₂—O—CH₂CH₂—O—CH₃. The skilled person is also considered to be able to recognize the most feasible deprotection reaction conditions, such as for example suitable acids, e.g. trifluoroacetic acid, hydrochloric acid, or suitable salts, such as for example tetrabutylammonium fluoride.

The skilled person is also considered to be able to recognize that when R¹ represents C(═O)-morpholinyl, said R¹ can be prepared from —C(═O)—NH—CH₂—CH₂—O—CH₂—CH₂—O—SO₂-4-methylphenyl, in the presence of sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide. Or that when R¹ represents —NH—C(═O)-morpholinyl, said R¹ can be prepared from —NH—C(═O)—O—C(CH₃)₃ in the presence of morpholine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone. Or that when R¹ represents hydroxylC₁₋₆alkyl, e.g. —CH₂—CH₂—OH, said R¹ can be prepared from the corresponding alkoxycarbonyl intermediate, e.g. —CH₂—C(═O)—O—CH₂—CH₃, in the presence of Dibal-H 1M in hexane, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

The present invention also comprises deuterated compounds. These deuterated compounds may be prepared by using the appropriate deuterated intermediates during the synthesis process. For instance the below intermediate

can be converted into the below intermediate

by reaction with iodomethane-D3 in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example cesium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.

The compounds of formula (I) may also be converted into each other via art-known reactions or functional group transformations.

For instance, compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents tetrahydropyranyl can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example HCl or trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, dioxane, or an alcohol, e.g. methanol, isopropanol and the like.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent monohaloalkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with a ring moiety as defined hereinabove and linked to the C₁₋₆alkyl moiety by the nitrogen atom, by reaction with a suitable ring moiety optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine or K₂CO₃ or sodium hydride, and optionally in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, N,N-dimethylformamide or 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl-OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl-F by reaction with diethylaminosulfur trifluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane and in the presence of catalytic amounts of an alcohol, such as for example ethanol. Likewise, a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ or R⁹ wherein said R⁶ or R⁹ is substituted with OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ or R⁹ wherein said R⁶ or R⁹ is substituted with F, by reaction with diethylaminosulfur trifluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ or R⁹ wherein said R⁶ or R⁹ is substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ or R⁹ wherein said R⁶ or R⁹ is substituted with —CH₂—OH, by reaction with a suitable reducing agent such as for example LiAlH₄, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with 1,3-dioxo-2H-isoindol-2-yl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with amino, by reaction with hydrazine monohydrate in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with amino, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction with Cl—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with halo, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NR⁴R⁵ or NR¹⁰R¹¹, by reaction with NHR⁴R⁵ or NHR¹⁰R¹¹, either using such amino in large excess or in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, N,N-dimethylacetamide or 1-methyl-pyrrolidinone.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents polyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl or polyhydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl or —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵ or —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction with polyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl-W or polyhydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl-W or C₁₋₆alkyl-W or W—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵ or W—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, wherein W represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride or K₂CO₃ or triethylamine or 4-dimethylamino-pyridine or diisopropylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or acetonitrile or dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents hydrogen can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl-OH, by reaction with W—C₁₋₆alkyl-O—Si(CH₃)₂(C(CH₃)₃) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide. The skilled person will realize that this step is followed by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran, or by reaction with tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, can also be converted into compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents ethyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction with C₁₋₆alkyl-vinylsulfone, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol or by reaction with C₁₋₆alkyl-2-bromoethylsulfone in the presence of a suitable deprotonating agent, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethyformamide.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents hydrogen can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents

by reaction with

in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide, wherein

represents a suitable nitrogen containing ring within the definition of R⁶. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ wherein said R⁶ is substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl or —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵ or wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ wherein said R⁹ is substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl or —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R⁶ or R⁹ is unsubstituted, by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example HCl and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, acetonitrile or an alcohol, e.g. isopropylalcohol. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ wherein said R⁶ is a ring moiety comprising a nitrogen atom which is substituted with —CH₂—OH or wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ wherein said R⁹ is a ring moiety comprising a nitrogen atom which is substituted with —CH₂—OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R⁶ or R⁹ is unsubstituted, by reaction with sodium hydroxide, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ or R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, wherein said R⁶ or said R⁹ is unsubstituted, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein said R⁶ or said R⁹ is substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction with W—C₁₋₆alkyl wherein W is as defined above, in the presence of a suitable base. Such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, can be converted into the corresponding carbonyl compound, by reaction with dess-Martin-periodinane, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ or R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, wherein said R⁶ or said R⁹ is substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl-halo, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein said R⁶ or said R⁹ is substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl-CN, by reaction with sodium cyanide, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example water or an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ wherein said R⁶ is unsubstituted or wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ wherein said R⁹ is unsubstituted, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R⁶ or R⁹ is substituted with —CH₃ or —CH(CH₃)₂, by reaction with formaldehyde or acetone and NaBH₃CN, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran or an alcohol, e.g. methanol.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ contains a R⁶ substituent substituted with OH or wherein R³ contains a R⁹ substituent substituted with OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R⁶ or R⁹ substituent is substituted with C₁₋₆alkyloxy, by reaction with W—C₁₋₆alkyl, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ contains a R⁶ substituent substituted with C₁₋₆alkyloxy or wherein R³ contains a R⁹ substituent substituted with C₁₋₆alkyloxy, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R⁶ or R⁹ substituent is substituted with —OH by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example hydrochloric acid. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ contains a R⁶ substituent substituted with halo or wherein R³ contains a R⁹ substituent substituted with halo can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R⁶ or R⁹ substituent is substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵ by reaction with NHR¹⁴R¹⁵ in a suitable solvent, such as for example 1-methyl-pyrrolidinone. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with COOH, by reaction with LiOH in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with COOH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NH₂ or —C(═O)—NHCH₃ or —C(═O)NR¹⁰R¹¹, by reaction with NH(Si(CH₃)₃)₂ or MeNH₃ ⁺Cl⁻ or NHR¹⁰R¹¹ in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide HCl and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine and a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane or N,N-dimethylformamide. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with 4,5-dihydro-imidazol-2-yl, by reaction under N₂ with ethylenediamine and trimethylaluminium in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example toluene and heptane. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with COOH, can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—N(CH₃)(OCH₃) by reaction with dimethylhydroxylamine, in the presence of carbonyldiimidazole and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with

can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with 2 OH's, by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or water. These compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with

can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with OH and NR¹⁰R¹¹, by reaction with NH₂R¹⁰R¹¹ optionally in salt form, such as for example NHR¹⁰R¹¹⁺Cl⁻, optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride or Na₂CO₃ or triethylamine, a suitable additive such as for example KI, and in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or an alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol or ethanol.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₃alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₃alkyl substituted with —C(CH₃)₂—OH, by reaction with iodomethane and Mg powder, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example diethylether or tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₅alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —OH, by reaction with a suitable reducing agent such as for example LiAlH₄, in a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₅alkyl substituted with —OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₅alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl by reaction with Cl—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents —CH₂—CH═CH₂, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents —CH₂—CHOH—CH₂—OH, by reaction with potassium permanganate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetone or water. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₄alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(C₁₋₄alkyl)═N—OH, by reaction with hydroxylamine, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example pyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NH₂, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—C(═O)—R⁶ or with —NH—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl or with —NH—C(═O)-polyhydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl or with —NH—C(═O)-polyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl or with —NH—C(═O)-polyhydroxypolyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction with the corresponding COOH analogue, e.g. R⁶—COOH or CF₃—C(CH₃)(OH)—COOH and the like, in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as 1-hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylamino)propyl)carbodiimide optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine. Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NH₂, can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NH—C(═O)—CF₃, by reaction with trifluoroacetic anhydride, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NH₂, can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH-polyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, e.g. —NH—CH₂—CH₂—F, by reaction with polyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl-W, with W as defined above, e.g. iodo-2-fluoroethane, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or dioxane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with cyano, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with tetrazolyl by reaction with sodium azide, and NH₄ ⁺Cl⁻ in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents —CH₂—C≡CH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents

by reaction with ethyl azidoacetate in the presence of CuI and a suitable base, such as for example diisopropylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents —CH₂—C≡CH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents

by reaction with sodium azide and formaldehyde, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example CuSO₄ and sodium L ascorbate, a suitable acid, such as for example acetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represent C₂₋₆alkynyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, by reaction with W—R⁹ wherein W is as defined above, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, a suitable co-catalyst such as CuI, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethylsulfoxide.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises R⁹ substituted with halo, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises R⁹ substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵ by reaction with NHR¹⁴R¹⁵ in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises C₂₋₆alkynyl, can be hydrogenated into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises C₂₋₆alkyl in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium on charcoal, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylacetate.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises C₂₋₆alkynyl, can be hydrogenated into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises C₂₋₆alkenyl in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example Lindlar catalyst, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylacetate.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂ can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ by reaction with bromotrimethylsilane in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein the R⁹ substituent is substituted with ═O, can be converted into the corresponding reduced R⁹ substituent by reaction with a suitable reducing agent, such as for example LiAlH₄ in a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises —NHR¹⁰ can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises —NR¹⁰—(C═O)-optionally substituted C₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction with the corresponding W—(C═O)-optionally substituted C₁₋₆alkyl wherein W represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NR¹⁰(benzyl) can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NHR¹⁰, by reaction with 1-chloroethylchloroformate in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents unsubstituted piperidine, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents 1-methyl-piperidine, by reaction with iodomethane in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents hydrogen can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents optionally substituted C₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction with optionally substituted C₁₋₆alkyl-W wherein W represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R² represents halo, e.g. bromo, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R² represents cyano, by reaction with zinc cyanide, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example Pd₂(dba)₃ and a suitable ligand, such as for example 1,1-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.

Said R² substituent being cyano can be converted into —CH₂—NH₂ by hydrogenation in the presence of NH₃ and Nickel.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R² represents —OCH₃ can be converted into a compounds of formula (I) wherein R² represents —OH by reaction with boron tribromide in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R² represents —OH can be converted into a compounds of formula (I) wherein R² represents —OCH₃ by reaction with methyl iodine in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R² represents hydrogen, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R² represents —CHOH—CF₃ by reaction with trifluoroacetaldehyde methyl hemiketal.

It is understood to be within the knowledge of the skilled man to recognize the above conversion reactions also applicable to the R^(3a) substituent.

A further aspect of the invention is a process for the preparation of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein, which process comprises:

-   (i) reacting an intermediate of formula

with

-   (a) W₁—R^(3d) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for     example sodium hydride or Cs₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as     for example N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide,     tetrahydrofuran or acetonitrile and wherein W₁ represents a suitable     leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, chloro and the     like, or —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃, and R^(3d) represents optionally substituted     C₁₋₆alkyl, such as for example —CH₂—C₃H₅; or -   (b)

in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, Cs2CO3, or potassium hydroxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide or acetonitrile and wherein R′ represents optionally substituted C1-4alkyl and R″ represents hydrogen or optionally substituted C1-4alkyl; or

-   (c) W₁—C₁₋₆alkyl-NHR¹⁰ in the presence of a suitable phase transfer     reagent such as for example tetrabutylammonium bromide, a suitable     base such as for example potassium hydroxide, and a suitable solvent     such as for example 2-methyltetrahydrofuran and water; -   (d) W₁—C₁₋₆alkyl-Ncycle in the presence of a suitable base, such as     for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for     example N,N-dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide; -   (ii) deprotecting an intermediate of formula

in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCl or trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane or an alcohol, e.g. methanol;

-   (iii) reacting an intermediate of formula

wherein R^(x) and R^(y) represent C₁₋₄alkyl, and R^(z) represent C₁₋₄alkyl or phenyl, for instance R^(x) and R^(y) represent CH₃ and R^(z) represents C(CH₃)₃ or phenyl, with tetrabutylammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. This type of reaction can also be performed in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example acetic acid or HCl, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofurane or methanol

-   (iv) reacting an intermediate of formula

wherein R^(u) is mesylate with

-   (a) NHR¹⁰R¹¹ optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as     for example triethylamine, K₂CO₃, Na₂CO₃ or sodium hydride, and     optionally a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile,     tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, N,N-dimethylformamide or     1-methyl-pyrrolidinone. This type of reaction can also be performed     with a suitable salt of NHR¹⁰R¹¹, e.g. HCl salt of NHR¹⁰R¹¹, or may     be performed in the presence of potassium iodide. In this way     compounds wherein R³ represents iodoC₁₋₆alkyl can be obtained; or -   (b)

in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile or 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, optionally in the presence of potassium iodide or a suitable base, such as for example Na₂CO₃, K₂CO₃ or triethylamine. This reaction can also be performed with a suitable salt of the suitable nitrogen containing ring within the definition of R⁹ (

represents a suitable nitrogen containing ring (unsubstituted or substituted) within the definition of R⁹); or

-   (c) NHR¹⁰P in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example     sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     dimethylacetamide and wherein P represents a suitable protective     group, such as for example —C(═O)—O—C(CH₃)₃, followed by a suitable     deprotection reaction; -   (v) reacting an intermediate of formula

with W₁—R^(3d) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example butyl lithium, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran, and wherein W₁ represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, and R^(3d) represents optionally substituted C₁₋₆alkyl. This reaction can also be performed with a protected form of the reactant, namely W₁—R^(3d)—P wherein P is a suitable protective group, such as for example tert-butyldimethylsilyl group followed by a suitable deprotection reaction, such as in the presence of a suitable desilylating reagent such as tetrabutylammonium fluoride, in a suitable solvent such as for example tetrahydrofuran or in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCl or trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or dichloromethane;

-   (vi) reacting an intermediate of formula

in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, butyl lithium or lithium diisopropylamide, in a suitable solvent such as for example tetrahydrofuran or N,N-dimethylformamide;

-   (vii) reacting an intermediate of formula

with

-   (a) R⁹-M wherein M is MgBr or Li in a suitable solvent such as for     example tetrahydrofuran; or -   (b) NHR¹⁰R¹¹ optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as     for example triethylamine, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate or     sodium hydride, and optionally a suitable solvent, such as for     example acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide; or -   (c)

optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate or sodium hydride, and optionally a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide. This reaction can also be performed with a suitable salt of

which is a suitable nitrogen containing ring (unsubstituted or substituted) within the definition of R⁹; or

-   (d) NHR¹⁰P: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example     sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example     dimethylacetamide and wherein P represents a suitable protective     group, such as for example —C(═O)—O—C(CH₃)₃, followed by a suitable     deprotection reaction; -   (viii) deprotecting an intermediate of formula

in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCl or trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane or an alcohol, e.g. methanol;

-   (ix) reacting an intermediate of formula

in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran;

-   (x) reacting an intermediate of formula

in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran;

-   (xi) reacting an intermediate of formula

with NHR¹⁴R¹⁵ in the presence of a suitable lewis acid, such as for example trimethylaluminium, and a suitable solvent, such as for example toluene;

-   (xii) reacting an intermediate of formula

in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran;

-   (xiii) reacting an intermediate of formula

in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran;

-   (xiv) deprotecting an intermediate of formula

in the presence of a suitable desilylating reagent such as tetrabutylammonium fluoride and in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran;

-   (xv) converting a compound of formula

in the presence of a suitable reducing agent, such as for example LiAlH₄ or NaBH₄, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran;

-   (xvi) converting a compound of formula

with a suitable reducing agent, such as for example BH₃.Me₂S or NaBH₄ in a suitable solvent such as for example tetrahydrofuran or dioxane;

-   (xvii) converting a compound of formula

with Mg in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran, and an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like;

-   (xviii) reacting an intermediate of formula

with W⁶—R^(3e) wherein R^(3e) represents optionally substituted C₂₋₆alkynyl and W₆ represents a suitable leaving group such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, or —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide;

-   (xix) reacting an intermediate of formula

with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. This reaction can also be performed with tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent such as for example tetrahydrofuran;

-   (xx) reacting an intermediate of formula

in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like;

-   (xxi) reacting an intermediate of formula

with di(C₁₋₆alkyl)vinylphosphonate in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tri-N-butylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile;

-   (xxii) deprotecting an intermediate of formula

wherein the D′N moiety represents a -D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom, and P is a suitable protective group, such as for example —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like;

-   (xxiii) reacting an intermediate of formula

with W₁₀—CN wherein W₁₀ represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaHCO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for example water or dioxane;

-   (xxiv) reacting an intermediate of formula

with a suitable base, such as for example N,N-diisopropylethylamine and triethylamine, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol;

-   -   wherein the variables are as defined herein; and optionally         thereafter converting one compound of the formula (I) into         another compound of the formula (I).

A further embodiment is a process for synthesis of a compound of formula (II) wherein:

an intermediate of formula (IX) is reacted with Z₁—C(═O)-D in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example N,N-diisopropylethylamine or K₂CO₃ or NaHCO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, dioxane and water.

A further embodiment is a process for synthesis of a compound of formula (X) wherein:

An intermediate of formula (XXII) is reacted with Z₁—C(═O)-D in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example N,N-diisopropylethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.

In a further embodiment the invention provides a novel intermediate. In one embodiment the invention provides any of the novel intermediates described above. In another embodiment the invention provides a novel intermediate of formula (II) or formula (X).

Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts, Solvates or Derivatives Thereof

In this section, as in all other sections of this application, unless the context indicates otherwise, references to formula (I) include references to all other sub-groups, preferences, embodiments and examples thereof as defined herein.

Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound also includes ionic forms, salts, solvates, isomers, tautomers, N-oxides, esters, prodrugs, isotopes and protected forms thereof, for example, as discussed below; preferably, the ionic forms, or salts or tautomers or isomers or N-oxides or solvates thereof; and more preferably, the ionic forms, or salts or tautomers or solvates or protected forms thereof, even more preferably the salts or tautomers or solvates thereof. Many compounds of the formula (I) can exist in the form of salts, for example acid addition salts or, in certain cases salts of organic and inorganic bases such as carboxylate, sulphonate and phosphate salts. All such salts are within the scope of this invention, and references to compounds of the formula (I) include the salt forms of the compounds. It will be appreciated that references to “derivatives” include references to ionic forms, salts, solvates, isomers, tautomers, N-oxides, esters, prodrugs, isotopes and protected forms thereof.

According to one aspect of the invention there is provided a compound as defined herein or a salt, tautomer, N-oxide or solvate thereof. According to a further aspect of the invention there is provided a compound as defined herein or a salt or solvate thereof. References to compounds of the formula (I) and sub-groups thereof as defined herein include within their scope the salts or solvates or tautomers or N-oxides of the compounds.

The salt forms of the compounds of the invention are typically pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are discussed in Berge et al. (1977) “Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts,” J. Pharm. Sci., Vol. 66, pp. 1-19. However, salts that are not pharmaceutically acceptable may also be prepared as intermediate forms which may then be converted into pharmaceutically acceptable salts. Such non-pharmaceutically acceptable salts forms, which may be useful, for example, in the purification or separation of the compounds of the invention, also form part of the invention.

The salts of the present invention can be synthesized from the parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemical methods such as methods described in Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use, P. Heinrich Stahl (Editor), Camille G. Wermuth (Editor), ISBN: 3-90639-026-8, Hardcover, 388 pages, August 2002. Generally, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, nonaqueous media such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile are used. The compounds of the invention may exist as mono- or di-salts depending upon the pKa of the acid from which the salt is formed.

Acid addition salts may be formed with a wide variety of acids, both inorganic and organic. Examples of acid addition salts include salts formed with an acid selected from the group consisting of acetic, 2,2-dichloroacetic, adipic, alginic, ascorbic (e.g. L-ascorbic), L-aspartic, benzenesulphonic, benzoic, 4-acetamidobenzoic, butanoic, (+) camphoric, camphor-sulphonic, (+)-(1S)-camphor-10-sulphonic, capric, caproic, caprylic, cinnamic, citric, cyclamic, dodecylsulphuric, ethane-1,2-disulphonic, ethanesulphonic, 2-hydroxyethanesulphonic, formic, fumaric, galactaric, gentisic, glucoheptonic, D-gluconic, glucuronic (e.g. D-glucuronic), glutamic (e.g. L-glutamic), α-oxoglutaric, glycolic, hippuric, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, hydriodic, isethionic, lactic (e.g. (+)-L-lactic, (±)-DL-lactic), lactobionic, maleic, malic, (−)-L-malic, malonic, (±)-DL-mandelic, methanesulphonic, naphthalenesulphonic (e.g. naphthalene-2-sulphonic), naphthalene-1,5-disulphonic, 1-hydroxy-2-naphthoic, nicotinic, nitric, oleic, orotic, oxalic, palmitic, pamoic, phosphoric, propionic, L-pyroglutamic, pyruvic, salicylic, 4-amino-salicylic, sebacic, stearic, succinic, sulphuric, tannic, (+)-L-tartaric, thiocyanic, toluenesulphonic (e.g. p-toluenesulphonic), undecylenic and valeric acids, as well as acylated amino acids and cation exchange resins.

One particular group of salts consists of salts formed from acetic, hydrochloric, hydriodic, phosphoric, nitric, sulphuric, citric, lactic, succinic, maleic, malic, isethionic, fumaric, benzenesulphonic, toluenesulphonic, methanesulphonic (mesylate), ethanesulphonic, naphthalenesulphonic, valeric, acetic, propanoic, butanoic, malonic, glucuronic and lactobionic acids. Another group of acid addition salts includes salts formed from acetic, adipic, ascorbic, aspartic, citric, DL-Lactic, fumaric, gluconic, glucuronic, hippuric, hydrochloric, glutamic, DL-malic, methanesulphonic, sebacic, stearic, succinic and tartaric acids.

If the compound is anionic, or has a functional group which may be anionic (e.g., —COOH may be —COO⁻), then a salt may be formed with a suitable cation. Examples of suitable inorganic cations include, but are not limited to, alkali metal ions such as Na⁺ and K⁺, alkaline earth metal cations such as Ca²⁺ and Mg²⁺, and other cations such as Al³⁺. Examples of suitable organic cations include, but are not limited to, ammonium ion (i.e., NH₄ ⁺) and substituted ammonium ions (e.g., NH₃R⁺, NH₂R₂ ⁺, NHR₃ ⁺, NR₄ ⁺).

Examples of some suitable substituted ammonium ions are those derived from: ethylamine, diethylamine, dicyclohexylamine, triethylamine, butylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine, benzylamine, phenylbenzylamine, choline, meglumine, and tromethamine, as well as amino acids, such as lysine and arginine. An example of a common quaternary ammonium ion is N(CH₃)₄ ⁺.

Where the compounds of the formula (I) contain an amine function, these may form quaternary ammonium salts, for example by reaction with an alkylating agent according to methods well known to the skilled person. Such quaternary ammonium compounds are within the scope of formula (I). Compounds of the formula (I) containing an amine function may also form N-oxides. A reference herein to a compound of the formula (I) that contains an amine function also includes the N-oxide. Where a compound contains several amine functions, one or more than one nitrogen atom may be oxidised to form an N-oxide. Particular examples of N-oxides are the N-oxides of a tertiary amine or a nitrogen atom of a nitrogen-containing heterocycle. N-Oxides can be formed by treatment of the corresponding amine with an oxidizing agent such as hydrogen peroxide or a per-acid (e.g. a peroxycarboxylic acid), see for example Advanced Organic Chemistry, by Jerry March, 4^(th) Edition, Wiley Interscience, pages. More particularly, N-oxides can be made by the procedure of L. W. Deady (Syn. Comm. (1977), 7, 509-514) in which the amine compound is reacted with m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid (MCPBA), for example, in an inert solvent such as dichloromethane.

The compounds of the invention may form solvates, for example with water (i.e., hydrates) or common organic solvents. As used herein, the term “solvate” means a physical association of the compounds of the present invention with one or more solvent molecules. This physical association involves varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen bonding. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. The term “solvate” is intended to encompass both solution-phase and isolatable solvates. Non-limiting examples of suitable solvates include compounds of the invention in combination with water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid or ethanolamine and the like. The compounds of the invention may exert their biological effects whilst they are in solution.

Solvates are well known in pharmaceutical chemistry. They can be important to the processes for the preparation of a substance (e.g. in relation to their purification, the storage of the substance (e.g. its stability) and the ease of handling of the substance and are often formed as part of the isolation or purification stages of a chemical synthesis. A person skilled in the art can determine by means of standard and long used techniques whether a hydrate or other solvate has formed by the isolation conditions or purification conditions used to prepare a given compound. Examples of such techniques include thermogravimetric analysis (TGA), differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), X-ray crystallography (e.g. single crystal X-ray crystallography or X-ray powder diffraction) and Solid State NMR (SS-NMR, also known as Magic Angle Spinning NMR or MAS-NMR). Such techniques are as much a part of the standard analytical toolkit of the skilled chemist as NMR, IR, HPLC and MS. Alternatively the skilled person can deliberately form a solvate using crystallisation conditions that include an amount of the solvent required for the particular solvate. Thereafter the standard methods described above, can be used to establish whether solvates had formed. Also encompassed by formula (I) are any complexes (e.g. inclusion complexes or clathrates with compounds such as cyclodextrins, or complexes with metals) of the compounds.

Furthermore, the compounds of the present invention may have one or more polymorph (crystalline) or amorphous forms and as such are intended to be included in the scope of the invention.

Compounds of the formula (I) may exist in a number of different geometric isomeric, and tautomeric forms and references to compounds of the formula (I) include all such forms. For the avoidance of doubt, where a compound can exist in one of several geometric isomeric or tautomeric forms and only one is specifically described or shown, all others are nevertheless embraced by formula (I). Other examples of tautomeric forms include, for example, keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms, as in, for example, the following tautomeric pairs: keto/enol (illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol, amidine/enediamines, nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, and nitro/aci-nitro.

Where compounds of the formula (I) contain one or more chiral centres, and can exist in the form of two or more optical isomers, references to compounds of the formula (I) include all optical isomeric forms thereof (e.g. enantiomers, epimers and diastereoisomers), either as individual optical isomers, or mixtures (e.g. racemic mixtures) of two or more optical isomers, unless the context requires otherwise. The optical isomers may be characterised and identified by their optical activity (i.e. as + and − isomers, or d and l isomers) or they may be characterised in terms of their absolute stereochemistry using the “R and S” nomenclature developed by Cahn, Ingold and Prelog, see Advanced Organic Chemistry by Jerry March, 4^(th) Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1992, pages 109-114, and see also Cahn, Ingold & Prelog (1966) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 5, 385-415. Optical isomers can be separated by a number of techniques including chiral chromatography (chromatography on a chiral support) and such techniques are well known to the person skilled in the art. As an alternative to chiral chromatography, optical isomers can be separated by forming diastereoisomeric salts with chiral acids such as (+)-tartaric acid, (−)-pyroglutamic acid, (−)-di-toluoyl-L-tartaric acid, (+)-mandelic acid, (−)-malic acid, and (−)-camphorsulphonic, separating the diastereoisomers by preferential crystallisation, and then dissociating the salts to give the individual enantiomer of the free base.

Where compounds of the formula (I) exist as two or more optical isomeric forms, one enantiomer in a pair of enantiomers may exhibit advantages over the other enantiomer, for example, in terms of biological activity. Thus, in certain circumstances, it may be desirable to use as a therapeutic agent only one of a pair of enantiomers, or only one of a plurality of diastereoisomers. Accordingly, the invention provides compositions containing a compound of the formula (I) having one or more chiral centres, wherein at least 55% (e.g. at least 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95%) of the compound of the formula (I) is present as a single optical isomer (e.g. enantiomer or diastereoisomer). In one general embodiment, 99% or more (e.g. substantially all) of the total amount of the compound of the formula (I) may be present as a single optical isomer (e.g. enantiomer or diastereoisomer). When a specific isomeric form is identified (e.g. S configuration, or E isomer), this means that said isomeric form is substantially free of the other isomer(s), i.e. said isomeric form is present in at least 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 99% or more (e.g. substantially all) of the total amount of the compound of the invention.

Hereinbefore or hereinafter, some compounds include the following bond

. This indicates that the compound is a single stereoisomer with unknown configuration or a mixture of stereoisomers.

The compounds of the invention include compounds with one or more isotopic substitutions, and a reference to a particular element includes within its scope all isotopes of the element. For example, a reference to hydrogen includes within its scope ¹H, ²H (D), and ³H (T). Similarly, references to carbon and oxygen include within their scope respectively ¹²C, ¹³C and ¹⁴C and ¹⁶O and ¹⁸O. The isotopes may be radioactive or non-radioactive. In one embodiment of the invention, the compounds contain no radioactive isotopes. Such compounds are preferred for therapeutic use. In another embodiment, however, the compound may contain one or more radioisotopes. Compounds containing such radioisotopes may be useful in a diagnostic context.

Esters such as carboxylic acid esters and acyloxy esters of the compounds of formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group are also embraced by formula (I). In one embodiment of the invention, formula (I) includes within its scope esters of compounds of the formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group. In another embodiment of the invention, formula (I) does not include within its scope esters of compounds of the formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group. Examples of esters are compounds containing the group —C(═O)OR, wherein R is an ester substituent, for example, a C₁₋₆ alkyl group, a heterocyclyl group, or a C₅₋₂₀ aryl group, preferably a C₁₋₆ alkyl group. Particular examples of ester groups include, but are not limited to, —C(═O)OCH₃, —C(═O)OCH₂CH₃, —C(═O)OC(CH₃)₃, and —C(═O)OPh. Examples of acyloxy (reverse ester) groups are represented by —OC(═O)R, wherein R is an acyloxy substituent, for example, a C₁₋₇ alkyl group, a C₃₋₂₀ heterocyclyl group, or a C₅₋₂₀ aryl group, preferably a C₁₋₇ alkyl group. Particular examples of acyloxy groups include, but are not limited to, —OC(═O)CH₃ (acetoxy), —OC(═O)CH₂CH₃, —OC(═O)C(CH₃)₃, —OC(═O)Ph, and —OC(═O)CH₂Ph.

For example, some prodrugs are esters of the active compound (e.g., a physiologically acceptable metabolically labile ester). By “prodrugs” is meant for example any compound that is converted in vivo into a biologically active compound of the formula (I). During metabolism, the ester group (—C(═O)OR) is cleaved to yield the active drug. Such esters may be formed by esterification, for example, of any of the carboxylic acid groups (—C(═O)OH) in the parent compound, with, where appropriate, prior protection of any other reactive groups present in the parent compound, followed by deprotection if required.

Examples of such metabolically labile esters include those of the formula —C(═O)OR wherein R is: C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g., -Me, -Et, -nPr, -iPr, -nBu, -sBu, -iBu, -tBu); C₁₋₆aminoalkyl [e.g., aminoethyl; 2-(N,N-diethylamino)ethyl; 2-(4-morpholino)ethyl); and acyloxy-C₁₋₇alkyl [e.g., acyloxymethyl; acyloxyethyl; pivaloyloxymethyl; acetoxymethyl; 1-acetoxyethyl; 1-(1-methoxy-1-methyl)ethyl-carbonyloxyethyl; 1-(benzoyloxy)ethyl; isopropoxy-carbonyloxymethyl; 1-isopropoxy-carbonyloxyethyl; cyclohexyl-carbonyloxymethyl; 1-cyclohexyl-carbonyloxyethyl; cyclohexyloxy-carbonyloxymethyl; 1-cyclohexyloxy-carbonyloxyethyl; (4-tetrahydropyranyloxy) carbonyloxymethyl; 1-(4-tetrahydropyranyloxy)carbonyloxyethyl; (4-tetrahydropyranyl)carbonyloxymethyl; and 1-(4-tetrahydropyranyl)carbonyloxyethyl]. Also, some prodrugs are activated enzymatically to yield the active compound, or a compound which, upon further chemical reaction, yields the active compound (for example, as in antigen-directed enzyme pro-drug therapy (ADEPT), gene-directed enzyme pro-drug therapy (GDEPT) and ligand-directed enzyme pro-drug therapy (LIDEPT) etc.). For example, the prodrug may be a sugar derivative or other glycoside conjugate, or may be an amino acid ester derivative.

Protein Tyrosine Kinases (PTK)

The compounds of the invention described herein inhibit or modulate the activity of certain tyrosine kinases, and thus the compounds will be useful in the treatment or prophylaxis, in particular the treatment, of disease states or conditions mediated by those tyrosine kinases, in particular FGFR.

FGFR

The fibroblast growth factor (FGF) family of protein tyrosine kinase (PTK) receptors regulates a diverse array of physiologic functions including mitogenesis, wound healing, cell differentiation and angiogenesis, and development. Both normal and malignant cell growth as well as proliferation are affected by changes in local concentration of FGFs, extracellular signalling molecules which act as autocrine as well as paracrine factors. Autocrine FGF signalling may be particularly important in the progression of steroid hormone-dependent cancers to a hormone independent state. FGFs and their receptors are expressed at increased levels in several tissues and cell lines and overexpression is believed to contribute to the malignant phenotype. Furthermore, a number of oncogenes are homologues of genes encoding growth factor receptors, and there is a potential for aberrant activation of FGF-dependent signalling in human pancreatic cancer (Knights et al., Pharmacology and Therapeutics 2010 125:1 (105-117); Korc M. et al Current Cancer Drug Targets 2009 9:5 (639-651)).

The two prototypic members are acidic fibroblast growth factor (aFGF or FGF1) and basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF or FGF2), and to date, at least twenty distinct FGF family members have been identified. The cellular response to FGFs is transmitted via four types of high affinity transmembrane protein tyrosine-kinase fibroblast growth factor receptors (FGFR) numbered 1 to 4 (FGFR1 to FGFR4).

Disruption of the FGFR1 pathway should affect tumor cell proliferation since this kinase is activated in many tumor types in addition to proliferating endothelial cells. The over-expression and activation of FGFR1 in tumor-associated vasculature has suggested a role for these molecules in tumor angiogenesis.

A recent study has shown a link between FGFR1 expression and tumorigenicity in Classic Lobular Carcinomas (CLC). CLCs account for 10-15% of all breast cancers and, in general, lack p53 and Her2 expression whilst retaining expression of the oestrogen receptor. A gene amplification of 8p12-p11.2 was demonstrated in ˜50% of CLC cases and this was shown to be linked with an increased expression of FGFR1. Preliminary studies with siRNA directed against FGFR1, or a small molecule inhibitor of the receptor, showed cell lines harbouring this amplification to be particularly sensitive to inhibition of this signalling pathway. Rhabdomyosarcoma (RMS) is the most common pediatric soft tissue sarcoma likely results from abnormal proliferation and differentiation during skeletal myogenesis. FGFR1 is over-expressed in primary rhabdomyosarcoma tumors and is associated with hypomethylation of a 5′ CpG island and abnormal expression of the AKT1, NOG, and BMP4 genes. FGFR1 has also been linked to squamous lung cancer, colorectal cancer, glioblastoma, astrocytomas, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer, melanoma, head and neck cancer, thyroid cancer, uterine cancer.

Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 has high affinity for the acidic and/or basic fibroblast growth factors, as well as the keratinocyte growth factor ligands. Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 also propagates the potent osteogenic effects of FGFs during osteoblast growth and differentiation. Mutations in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2, leading to complex functional alterations, were shown to induce abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), implying a major role of FGFR signalling in intramembranous bone formation. For example, in Apert (AP) syndrome, characterized by premature cranial suture ossification, most cases are associated with point mutations engendering gain-of-function in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2. In addition, mutation screening in patients with syndromic craniosynostoses indicates that a number of recurrent FGFR2 mutations accounts for severe forms of Pfeiffer syndrome. Particular mutations of FGFR2 include W290C, D321A, Y340C, C342R, C342S, C342W, N549H, K641R in FGFR2.

Several severe abnormalities in human skeletal development, including Apert, Crouzon, Jackson-Weiss, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrata, and Pfeiffer syndromes are associated with the occurrence of mutations in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2. Most, if not all, cases of Pfeiffer Syndrome (PS) are also caused by de novo mutation of the fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 gene, and it was recently shown that mutations in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 break one of the cardinal rules governing ligand specificity. Namely, two mutant splice forms of fibroblast growth factor receptor, FGFR2c and FGFR2b, have acquired the ability to bind to and be activated by atypical FGF ligands. This loss of ligand specificity leads to aberrant signalling and suggests that the severe phenotypes of these disease syndromes result from ectopic ligand-dependent activation of fibroblast growth factor receptor 2.

Genetic aberrations of the FGFR3 receptor tyrosine kinase such as chromosomal translocations or point mutations result in ectopically expressed or deregulated, constitutively active, FGFR3 receptors. Such abnormalities are linked to a subset of multiple myelomas and in bladder, hepatocellular, oral squamous cell carcinoma and cervical carcinomas. Accordingly, FGFR3 inhibitors would be useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma, bladder and cervical carcinomas. FGFR3 is also over-expressed in bladder cancer, in particular invasive bladder cancer. FGFR3 is frequently activated by mutation in urothelial carcinoma (UC). Increased expression was associated with mutation (85% of mutant tumors showed high-level expression) but also 42% of tumors with no detectable mutation showed over-expression, including many muscle-invasive tumors. FGFR3 is also linked to endometrial and thyroid cancer.

Over expression of FGFR4 has been linked to poor prognosis in both prostate and thyroid carcinomas. In addition a germline polymorphism (Gly388Arg) is associated with increased incidence of lung, breast, colon, liver (HCC) and prostate cancers. In addition, a truncated form of FGFR4 (including the kinase domain) has also been found to be present in 40% of pituitary tumours but not present in normal tissue. FGFR4 overexpression has been observed in liver, colon and lung tumours. FGFR4 has been implicated in colorectal and liver cancer where expression of its ligand FGF19 is frequently elevated. FGFR4 is also linked to astrocytomas, rhabdomyosarcoma.

Fibrotic conditions are a major medical problem resulting from abnormal or excessive deposition of fibrous tissue. This occurs in many diseases, including liver cirrhosis, glomerulonephritis, pulmonary fibrosis, systemic fibrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, as well as the natural process of wound healing. The mechanisms of pathological fibrosis are not fully understood but are thought to result from the actions of various cytokines (including tumor necrosis factor (TNF), fibroblast growth factors (FGF's), platelet derived growth factor (PDGF) and transforming growth factor beta. (TGFβ) involved in the proliferation of fibroblasts and the deposition of extracellular matrix proteins (including collagen and fibronectin). This results in alteration of tissue structure and function and subsequent pathology.

A number of preclinical studies have demonstrated the up-regulation of fibroblast growth factors in preclinical models of lung fibrosis. TGFβ1 and PDGF have been reported to be involved in the fibrogenic process and further published work suggests the elevation of FGF's and consequent increase in fibroblast proliferation, may be in response to elevated TGFβ1. The potential therapeutic benefit of targeting the fibrotic mechanism in conditions such as idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (IPF) is suggested by the reported clinical effect of the anti-fibrotic agent pirfenidone. Idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (also referred to as Cryptogenic fibrosing alveolitis) is a progressive condition involving scarring of the lung. Gradually, the air sacs of the lungs become replaced by fibrotic tissue, which becomes thicker, causing an irreversible loss of the tissue's ability to transfer oxygen into the bloodstream. The symptoms of the condition include shortness of breath, chronic dry coughing, fatigue, chest pain and loss of appetite resulting in rapid weight loss. The condition is extremely serious with approximately 50% mortality after 5 years.

As such, the compounds which inhibit FGFR will be useful in providing a means of preventing the growth or inducing apoptosis in tumours, particularly by inhibiting angiogenesis. It is therefore anticipated that the compounds will prove useful in treating or preventing proliferative disorders such as cancers. In particular tumours with activating mutants of receptor tyrosine kinases or upregulation of receptor tyrosine kinases may be particularly sensitive to the inhibitors. Patients with activating mutants of any of the isoforms of the specific RTKs discussed herein may also find treatment with RTK inhibitors particularly beneficial.

Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor (VEGFR)

Chronic proliferative diseases are often accompanied by profound angiogenesis, which can contribute to or maintain an inflammatory and/or proliferative state, or which leads to tissue destruction through the invasive proliferation of blood vessels.

Angiogenesis is generally used to describe the development of new or replacement blood vessels, or neovascularisation. It is a necessary and physiological normal process by which vasculature is established in the embryo. Angiogenesis does not occur, in general, in most normal adult tissues, exceptions being sites of ovulation, menses and wound healing. Many diseases, however, are characterized by persistent and unregulated angiogenesis. For instance, in arthritis, new capillary blood vessels invade the joint and destroy cartilage. In diabetes (and in many different eye diseases), new vessels invade the macula or retina or other ocular structures, and may cause blindness. The process of atherosclerosis has been linked to angiogenesis. Tumor growth and metastasis have been found to be angiogenesis-dependent.

The recognition of the involvement of angiogenesis in major diseases has been accompanied by research to identify and develop inhibitors of angiogenesis. These inhibitors are generally classified in response to discrete targets in the angiogenesis cascade, such as activation of endothelial cells by an angiogenic signal; synthesis and release of degradative enzymes; endothelial cell migration; proliferation of endothelial cells; and formation of capillary tubules. Therefore, angiogenesis occurs in many stages and attempts are underway to discover and develop compounds that work to block angiogenesis at these various stages.

There are publications that teach that inhibitors of angiogenesis, working by diverse mechanisms, are beneficial in diseases such as cancer and metastasis, ocular diseases, arthritis and hemangioma.

Vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), a polypeptide, is mitogenic for endothelial cells in vitro and stimulates angiogenic responses in vivo. VEGF has also been linked to inappropriate angiogenesis. VEGFR(s) are protein tyrosine kinases (PTKs). PTKs catalyze the phosphorylation of specific tyrosine residues in proteins involved in cell function thus regulating cell growth, survival and differentiation.

Three PTK receptors for VEGF have been identified: VEGFR-1 (Flt-1); VEGFR-2 (Flk-1 or KDR) and VEGFR-3 (Flt-4). These receptors are involved in angiogenesis and participate in signal transduction. Of particular interest is VEGFR-2, which is a transmembrane receptor PTK expressed primarily in endothelial cells. Activation of VEGFR-2 by VEGF is a critical step in the signal transduction pathway that initiates tumour angiogenesis. VEGF expression may be constitutive to tumour cells and can also be upregulated in response to certain stimuli. One such stimuli is hypoxia, where VEGF expression is upregulated in both tumour and associated host tissues. The VEGF ligand activates VEGFR-2 by binding with its extracellular VEGF binding site. This leads to receptor dimerization of VEGFRs and autophosphorylation of tyrosine residues at the intracellular kinase domain of VEGFR-2. The kinase domain operates to transfer a phosphate from ATP to the tyrosine residues, thus providing binding sites for signalling proteins downstream of VEGFR-2 leading ultimately to initiation of angiogenesis. Inhibition at the kinase domain binding site of VEGFR-2 would block phosphorylation of tyrosine residues and serve to disrupt initiation of angiogenesis.

Angiogenesis is a physiologic process of new blood vessel formation mediated by various cytokines called angiogenic factors. Although its potential pathophysiologic role in solid tumors has been extensively studied for more than 3 decades, enhancement of angiogenesis in chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL) and other malignant hematological disorders has been recognized more recently. An increased level of angiogenesis has been documented by various experimental methods both in bone marrow and lymph nodes of patients with CLL. Although the role of angiogenesis in the pathophysiology of this disease remains to be fully elucidated, experimental data suggest that several angiogenic factors play a role in the disease progression. Biologic markers of angiogenesis were also shown to be of prognostic relevance in CLL. This indicates that VEGFR inhibitors may also be of benefit for patients with leukemia's such as CLL.

In order for a tumour mass to get beyond a critical size, it must develop an associated vasculature. It has been proposed that targeting a tumor vasculature would limit tumor expansion and could be a useful cancer therapy. Observations of tumor growth have indicated that small tumour masses can persist in a tissue without any tumour-specific vasculature. The growth arrest of nonvascularized tumors has been attributed to the effects of hypoxia at the center of the tumor. More recently, a variety of proangiogenic and antiangiogenic factors have been identified and have led to the concept of the “angiogenic switch,” a process in which disruption of the normal ratio of angiogenic stimuli and inhibitors in a tumor mass allows for autonomous vascularization. The angiogenic switch appears to be governed by the same genetic alterations that drive malignant conversion: the activation of oncogenes and the loss of tumour suppressor genes. Several growth factors act as positive regulators of angiogenesis. Foremost among these are vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF), and angiogenin. Proteins such as thrombospondin (Tsp-1), angiostatin, and endostatin function as negative regulators of angiogenesis.

Inhibition of VEGFR2 but not VEGFR1 markedly disrupts angiogenic switching, persistent angiogenesis, and initial tumor growth in a mouse model. In late-stage tumors, phenotypic resistance to VEGFR2 blockade emerged, as tumors regrew during treatment after an initial period of growth suppression. This resistance to VEGF blockade involves reactivation of tumour angiogenesis, independent of VEGF and associated with hypoxia-mediated induction of other proangiogenic factors, including members of the FGF family. These other proangiogenic signals are functionally implicated in the revascularization and regrowth of tumours in the evasion phase, as FGF blockade impairs progression in the face of VEGF inhibition.

There is evidence for normalization of glioblastoma blood vessels in patients treated with a pan-VEGF receptor tyrosine kinase inhibitor, AZD2171, in a phase 2 study. MRI determination of vessel normalization in combination with circulating biomarkers provides for an effective means to assess response to antiangiogenic agents.

PDGFR

A malignant tumour is the product of uncontrolled cell proliferation. Cell growth is controlled by a delicate balance between growth-promoting and growth-inhibiting factors. In normal tissue the production and activity of these factors results in differentiated cells growing in a controlled and regulated manner that maintains the normal integrity and functioning of the organ. The malignant cell has evaded this control; the natural balance is disturbed (via a variety of mechanisms) and unregulated, aberrant cell growth occurs. A growth factor of importance in tumour development is the platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF) that comprises a family of peptide growth factors that signal through cell surface tyrosine kinase receptors (PDGFR) and stimulate various cellular functions including growth, proliferation, and differentiation.

Advantages of a Selective Inhibitor

Development of FGFR kinase inhibitors with a differentiated selectivity profile provides a new opportunity to use these targeted agents in patient sub-groups whose disease is driven by FGFR deregulation. Compounds that exhibit reduced inhibitory action on additional kinases, particularly VEGFR2 and PDGFR-beta, offer the opportunity to have a differentiated side-effect or toxicity profile and as such allow for a more effective treatment of these indications. Inhibitors of VEGFR2 and PDGFR-beta are associated with toxicities such as hypertension or oedema respectively. In the case of VEGFR2 inhibitors this hypertensive effect is often dose limiting, may be contraindicated in certain patient populations and requires clinical management.

Biological Activity and Therapeutic Uses

The compounds of the invention, and subgroups thereof, have fibroblast growth factor receptor (FGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity and/or vascular endothelial growth factor receptor (VEGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity, and/or platelet derived growth factor receptor (PDGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity, and which will be useful in preventing or treating disease states or conditions described herein. In addition the compounds of the invention, and subgroups thereof, will be useful in preventing or treating diseases or condition mediated by the kinases. References to the preventing or prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition such as cancer include within their scope alleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer.

As used herein, the term “modulation”, as applied to the activity of a kinase, is intended to define a change in the level of biological activity of the protein kinase. Thus, modulation encompasses physiological changes which effect an increase or decrease in the relevant protein kinase activity. In the latter case, the modulation may be described as “inhibition”. The modulation may arise directly or indirectly, and may be mediated by any mechanism and at any physiological level, including for example at the level of gene expression (including for example transcription, translation and/or post-translational modification), at the level of expression of genes encoding regulatory elements which act directly or indirectly on the levels of kinase activity. Thus, modulation may imply elevated/suppressed expression or over- or under-expression of a kinase, including gene amplification (i.e. multiple gene copies) and/or increased or decreased expression by a transcriptional effect, as well as hyper- (or hypo-)activity and (de)activation of the protein kinase(s) (including (de)activation) by mutation(s). The terms “modulated”, “modulating” and “modulate” are to be interpreted accordingly.

As used herein, the term “mediated”, as used e.g. in conjunction with a kinase as described herein (and applied for example to various physiological processes, diseases, states, conditions, therapies, treatments or interventions) is intended to operate limitatively so that the various processes, diseases, states, conditions, treatments and interventions to which the term is applied are those in which the kinase plays a biological role. In cases where the term is applied to a disease, state or condition, the biological role played by a kinase may be direct or indirect and may be necessary and/or sufficient for the manifestation of the symptoms of the disease, state or condition (or its aetiology or progression). Thus, kinase activity (and in particular aberrant levels of kinase activity, e.g. kinase over-expression) need not necessarily be the proximal cause of the disease, state or condition: rather, it is contemplated that the kinase mediated diseases, states or conditions include those having multifactorial aetiologies and complex progressions in which the kinase in question is only partially involved. In cases where the term is applied to treatment, prophylaxis or intervention, the role played by the kinase may be direct or indirect and may be necessary and/or sufficient for the operation of the treatment, prophylaxis or outcome of the intervention. Thus, a disease state or condition mediated by a kinase includes the development of resistance to any particular cancer drug or treatment.

Thus, for example, the compounds of the invention may be useful in alleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer.

More particularly, the compounds of the formulae (I) and sub-groups thereof are inhibitors of FGFRs. For example, compounds of the invention have activity against FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3, and/or FGFR4, and in particular FGFRs selected from FGFR1, FGFR2 and FGFR3; or in particular the compounds of formula (I) and sub-groups thereof are inhibitors of FGFR4.

Preferred compounds are compounds that inhibit one or more FGFR selected from FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3, and FGFR4. Preferred compounds of the invention are those having IC₅₀ values of less than 0.1 μM.

Compounds of the invention also have activity against VEGFR.

In addition many of the compounds of the invention exhibit selectivity for the FGFR 1, 2, and/or 3, and/or 4 compared to VEGFR (in particular VEGFR2) and/or PDGFR and such compounds represent one preferred embodiment of the invention. In particular, the compounds exhibit selectivity over VEGFR2. For example, many compounds of the invention have IC₅₀ values against FGFR1, 2 and/or 3 and/or 4 that are between a tenth and a hundredth of the IC₅₀ against VEGFR (in particular VEGFR2) and/or PDGFR B. In particular preferred compounds of the invention have at least 10 times greater activity against or inhibition of FGFR in particular FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3 and/or FGFR4 than VEGFR2. More preferably the compounds of the invention have at least 100 times greater activity against or inhibition of FGFR in particular FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3 and/or FGFR4 than VEGFR2. This can be determined using the methods described herein.

As a consequence of their activity in modulating or inhibiting FGFR, and/or VEGFR kinases, the compounds will be useful in providing a means of preventing the growth or inducing apoptosis of neoplasias, particularly by inhibiting angiogenesis. It is therefore anticipated that the compounds will prove useful in treating or preventing proliferative disorders such as cancers. In addition, the compounds of the invention could be useful in the treatment of diseases in which there is a disorder of proliferation, apoptosis or differentiation.

In particular tumours with activating mutants of VEGFR or upregulation of VEGFR and patients with elevated levels of serum lactate dehydrogenase may be particularly sensitive to the compounds of the invention. Patients with activating mutants of any of the isoforms of the specific RTKs discussed herein may also find treatment with the compounds of the invention particularly beneficial. For example, VEGFR overexpression in acute leukemia cells where the clonal progenitor may express VEGFR. Also, particular tumours with activating mutants or upregulation or overexpression of any of the isoforms of FGFR such as FGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4 may be particularly sensitive to the compounds of the invention and thus patients as discussed herein with such particular tumours may also find treatment with the compounds of the invention particularly beneficial. It may be preferred that the treatment is related to or directed at a mutated form of one of the receptor tyrosine kinases, such as discussed herein. Diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be performed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RTPCR and FISH.

Examples of cancers which may be treated (or inhibited) include, but are not limited to, a carcinoma, for example a carcinoma of the bladder, breast, colon (e.g. colorectal carcinomas such as colon adenocarcinoma and colon adenoma), kidney, urothelial, uterus, epidermis, liver, lung (for example adenocarcinoma, small cell lung cancer and non-small cell lung carcinomas, squamous lung cancer), oesophagus, head and neck, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas (e.g. exocrine pancreatic carcinoma), stomach, gastrointestinal (also known as gastric) cancer (e.g. gastrointestinal stromal tumours), cervix, endometrium, thyroid, prostate, or skin (for example squamous cell carcinoma or dermatofibrosarcoma protuberans); pituitary cancer, a hematopoietic tumour of lymphoid lineage, for example leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, B-cell lymphoma (e.g. diffuse large B-cell lymphoma), T-cell lymphoma, Hodgkin's lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, hairy cell lymphoma, or Burkett's lymphoma; a hematopoietic tumour of myeloid lineage, for example leukemias, acute and chronic myelogenous leukemias, chronic myelomonocytic leukemia (CMML), myeloproliferative disorder, myeloproliferative syndrome, myelodysplastic syndrome, or promyelocytic leukemia; multiple myeloma; thyroid follicular cancer; hepatocellular cancer, a tumour of mesenchymal origin (e.g. Ewing's sarcoma), for example fibrosarcoma or rhabdomyosarcoma; a tumour of the central or peripheral nervous system, for example astrocytoma, neuroblastoma, glioma (such as glioblastoma multiforme) or schwannoma; melanoma; seminoma; teratocarcinoma; osteosarcoma; xeroderma pigmentosum; keratoctanthoma; thyroid follicular cancer; or Kaposi's sarcoma. In particular, squamous lung cancer, breast cancer, colorectal cancer, glioblastoma, astrocytomas, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer, melanoma, head and neck cancer, thyroid cancer, uterine cancer, gastric cancer, hepatocellular cancer, cervix cancer, multiple myeloma, bladder cancer, endometrial cancer, urothelial cancer, colon cancer, rhabdomyosarcoma, pituitary gland cancer.

Certain cancers are resistant to treatment with particular drugs. This can be due to the type of the tumour or can arise due to treatment with the compound. In this regard, references to multiple myeloma includes bortezomib sensitive multiple myeloma or refractory multiple myeloma. Similarly, references to chronic myelogenous leukemia includes imitanib sensitive chronic myelogenous leukemia and refractory chronic myelogenous leukemia. Chronic myelogenous leukemia is also known as chronic myeloid leukemia, chronic granulocytic leukemia or CML. Likewise, acute myelogenous leukemia, is also called acute myeloblastic leukemia, acute granulocytic leukemia, acute nonlymphocytic leukaemia or AML.

The compounds of the invention can also be used in the treatment of hematopoetic diseases of abnormal cell proliferation whether pre-malignant or stable such as myeloproliferative diseases. Myeloproliferative diseases (“MPD”s) are a group of diseases of the bone marrow in which excess cells are produced. They are related to, and may evolve into, myelodysplastic syndrome. Myeloproliferative diseases include polycythemia vera, essential thrombocythemia and primary myelofibrosis. A further haematological disorder is hypereosinophilic syndrome. T-cell lymphoproliferative diseases include those derived from natural Killer cells.

In addition the compounds of the invention can be used to gastrointestinal (also known as gastric) cancer e.g. gastrointestinal stromal tumours. Gastrointestinal cancer refers to malignant conditions of the gastrointestinal tract, including the esophagus, stomach, liver, biliary system, pancreas, bowels, and anus.

Thus, in the pharmaceutical compositions, uses or methods of this invention for treating a disease or condition comprising abnormal cell growth, the disease or condition comprising abnormal cell growth in one embodiment is a cancer.

Particular subsets of cancers include multiple myeloma, bladder, cervical, prostate and thyroid carcinomas, lung, breast, and colon cancers.

A further subset of cancers includes multiple myeloma, bladder, hepatocellular, oral squamous cell carcinoma and cervical carcinomas.

The compound of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR1 inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention of breast cancer in particular Classic Lobular Carcinomas (CLC).

As the compounds of the invention have FGFR4 activity they will also be useful in the treatment of prostate or pituitary cancers, or they will be useful in the treatment of breast cancer, lung cancer, prostate cancer, liver cancer (HCC) or lung cancer.

In particular the compounds of the invention as FGFR inhibitors, are useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma, myeloproliferatoive disorders, endometrial cancer, prostate cancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, breast cancer, gastric cancer, colorectal cancer, and oral squamous cell carcinoma.

Further subsets of cancer are multiple myeloma, endometrial cancer, bladder cancer, cervical cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer, breast cancer, colorectal cancer and thyroid carcinomas.

In particular the compounds of the invention are useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma (in particular multiple myeloma with t(4;14) translocation or overexpressing FGFR3), prostate cancer (hormone refractory prostrate carcinomas), endometrial cancer (in particular endometrial tumours with activating mutations in FGFR2) and breast cancer (in particular lobular breast cancer).

In particular the compounds are useful in the treatment of lobular carcinomas such as CLC (Classic lobular carcinoma).

As the compounds have activity against FGFR3 they will be useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma and bladder cancer.

In particular the compounds are useful for the treatment of t(4;14) translocation positive multiple myeloma.

In one embodiment the compounds may be useful for the treatment of sarcoma. In one embodiment the compounds may be useful for the treatment of lung cancer, e.g. squamous cell carcinoma.

As the compounds have activity against FGFR2 they will be useful in the treatment of endometrial, ovarian, gastric, hepatocellular, uterine, cervix and colorectal cancers. FGFR2 is also overexpressed in epithelial ovarian cancer, therefore the compounds of the invention may be specifically useful in treating ovarian cancer such as epithelial ovarian cancer.

In one embodiment, the compounds may be useful for the treatment of lung cancer, in particular NSCLC, squamous cell carcinoma, liver cancer, kidney cancer, breast cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, prostate cancer.

Compounds of the invention may also be useful in the treatment of tumours pre-treated with VEGFR2 inhibitor or VEGFR2 antibody (e.g. Avastin).

In particular the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of VEGFR2-resistant tumours. VEGFR2 inhibitors and antibodies are used in the treatment of thyroid and renal cell carcinomas, therefore the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of VEGFR2-resistant thyroid and renal cell carcinomas.

The cancers may be cancers which are sensitive to inhibition of any one or more FGFRs selected from FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3, FGFR4, for example, one or more FGFRs selected from FGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3.

Whether or not a particular cancer is one which is sensitive to inhibition of FGFR or VEGFR signalling may be determined by means of a cell growth assay as set out below or by a method as set out in the section headed “Methods of Diagnosis”.

The compounds of the invention, and in particular those compounds having FGFR, or VEGFR inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention of cancers of a type associated with or characterised by the presence of elevated levels of FGFR, or VEGFR, for example the cancers referred to in this context in the introductory section of this application.

The compounds of the present invention may be useful for the treatment of the adult population. The compounds of the present invention may be useful for the treatment of the pediatric population.

It has been discovered that some FGFR inhibitors can be used in combination with other anticancer agents. For example, it may be beneficial to combine an inhibitor that induces apoptosis with another agent which acts via a different mechanism to regulate cell growth thus treating two of the characteristic features of cancer development. Examples of such combinations are set out below.

The compounds of the invention may be useful in treating other conditions which result from disorders in proliferation such as type II or non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, autoimmune diseases, head trauma, stroke, epilepsy, neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's, motor neurone disease, progressive supranuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration and Pick's disease for example autoimmune diseases and neurodegenerative diseases.

One sub-group of disease states and conditions that the compounds of the invention may be useful consists of inflammatory diseases, cardiovascular diseases and wound healing.

FGFR, and VEGFR are also known to play a role in apoptosis, angiogenesis, proliferation, differentiation and transcription and therefore the compounds of the invention could also be useful in the treatment of the following diseases other than cancer; chronic inflammatory diseases, for example systemic lupus erythematosus, autoimmune mediated glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, autoimmune diabetes mellitus, Eczema hypersensitivity reactions, asthma, COPD, rhinitis, and upper respiratory tract disease; cardiovascular diseases for example cardiac hypertrophy, restenosis, atherosclerosis; neurodegenerative disorders, for example Alzheimer's disease, AIDS-related dementia, Parkinson's disease, amyotropic lateral sclerosis, retinitis pigmentosa, spinal muscular atropy and cerebellar degeneration; glomerulonephritis; myelodysplastic syndromes, ischemic injury associated myocardial infarctions, stroke and reperfusion injury, arrhythmia, atherosclerosis, toxin-induced or alcohol related liver diseases, haematological diseases, for example, chronic anemia and aplastic anemia; degenerative diseases of the musculoskeletal system, for example, osteoporosis and arthritis, aspirin-sensitive rhinosinusitis, cystic fibrosis, multiple sclerosis, kidney diseases and cancer pain.

In addition, mutations of FGFR2 are associated with several severe abnormalities in human skeletal development and thus the compounds of invention could be useful in the treatment of abnormalities in human skeletal development, including abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), Apert (AP) syndrome, Crouzon syndrome, Jackson-Weiss syndrome, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrate syndrome, and Pfeiffer syndrome.

The compound of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR2 or FGFR3 inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention of the skeletal diseases. Particular skeletal diseases are achondroplasia or thanatophoric dwarfism (also known as thanatophoric dysplasia).

The compound of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3 inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention in pathologies in which progressive fibrosis is a symptom. Fibrotic conditions in which the compounds of the inventions may be useful in the treatment of include diseases exhibiting abnormal or excessive deposition of fibrous tissue for example in liver cirrhosis, glomerulonephritis, pulmonary fibrosis, systemic fibrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, as well as the natural process of wound healing. In particular the compounds of the inventions may also be useful in the treatment of lung fibrosis in particular in idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis.

The over-expression and activation of FGFR and VEGFR in tumor-associated vasculature has also suggested a role for compounds of the invention in preventing and disrupting initiation of tumor angiogenesis. In particular the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of cancer, metastasis, leukemia's such as CLL, ocular diseases such as age-related macular degeneration in particular wet form of age-related macular degeneration, ischemic proliferative retinopathies such as retinopathy of prematurity (ROP) and diabetic retinopathy, rheumatoid arthritis and hemangioma.

The activity of the compounds of the invention as inhibitors of FGFR1-4, VEGFR and/or PDGFR A/B can be measured using the assays set forth in the examples below and the level of activity exhibited by a given compound can be defined in terms of the IC₅₀ value. Preferred compounds of the present invention are compounds having an IC₅₀ value of less than 1 μM, more preferably less than 0.1 μM.

The invention provides compounds that have FGFR inhibiting or modulating activity, and which may be useful in preventing or treating disease states or conditions mediated by FGFR kinases.

In one embodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein for use in therapy, for use as a medicine. In a further embodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein for use in the prophylaxis or treatment, in particular in the treatment, of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase.

Thus, for example, the compounds of the invention may be useful in alleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer. Therefore, in a further embodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein for use in the prophylaxis or treatment, in particular the treatment, of cancer. In one embodiment, the compound as defined herein is for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of FGFR-dependent cancer. In one embodiment, the compound as defined herein is for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer mediated by FGFR kinases.

Accordingly, the invention provides inter alia:

-   -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or         condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, which method comprises         administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the         formula (I) as defined herein.     -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or         condition as described herein, which method comprises         administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the         formula (I) as defined herein.     -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, which         method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a         compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.     -   A method for alleviating or reducing the incidence of a disease         state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, which method         comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound         of the formula (I) as defined herein.     -   A method of inhibiting a FGFR kinase, which method comprises         contacting the kinase with a kinase-inhibiting compound of the         formula (I) as defined herein.     -   A method of modulating a cellular process (for example cell         division) by inhibiting the activity of a FGFR kinase using a         compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.     -   A compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use as a         modulator of a cellular process (for example cell division) by         inhibiting the activity of a FGFR kinase.     -   A compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use in the         prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, in particular the treatment         of cancer.     -   A compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use as a         modulator (e.g. inhibitor) of FGFR.     -   The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the         manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of         a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, the         compound having the formula (I) as defined herein.     -   The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the         manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of         a disease state or condition as described herein.     -   The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the         manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment, in         particular the treatment, of cancer.     -   The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the         manufacture of a medicament for modulating (e.g. inhibiting) the         activity of FGFR.     -   Use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein in the         manufacture of a medicament for modulating a cellular process         (for example cell division) by inhibiting the activity of a FGFR         kinase.     -   The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for         the manufacture of a medicament for prophylaxis or treatment of         a disease or condition characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR         kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4).     -   The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for         the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment         of a cancer, the cancer being one which is characterised by         up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or         FGFR4).     -   The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for         the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment         of cancer in a patient selected from a sub-population possessing         a genetic aberrations of FGFR3 kinase.     -   The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for         the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment         of cancer in a patient who has been diagnosed as forming part of         a sub-population possessing a genetic aberrations of FGFR3         kinase.     -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease or         condition characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g.         FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4), the method comprising         administering a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.     -   A method for alleviating or reducing the incidence of a disease         or condition characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase         (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4), the method comprising         administering a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.     -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of (or alleviating or         reducing the incidence of) cancer in a patient suffering from or         suspected of suffering from cancer; which method comprises (i)         subjecting a patient to a diagnostic test to determine whether         the patient possesses a genetic aberrations of FGFR3 gene;         and (ii) where the patient does possess the said variant,         thereafter administering to the patient a compound of the         formula (I) as defined herein having FGFR3 kinase inhibiting         activity.     -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of (or alleviating or         reducing the incidence of) a disease state or condition         characterised by up-regulation of an FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or         FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4); which method comprises (i) subjecting         a patient to a diagnostic test to detect a marker characteristic         of up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3         or FGFR4) and (ii) where the diagnostic test is indicative of         up-regulation of a FGFR kinase, thereafter administering to the         patient a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein having         FGFR kinase inhibiting activity.

In one embodiment, the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a oncology related disease (e.g. cancer). In one embodiment, the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a non-oncology related disease (e.g. any disease disclosed herein excluding cancer). In one embodiment the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a condition described herein. In one embodiment the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a skeletal condition described herein. Particular abnormalities in human skeletal development, include abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), Apert (AP) syndrome, Crouzon syndrome, Jackson-Weiss syndrome, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrate syndrome, Pfeiffer syndrome, achondroplasia and thanatophoric dwarfism (also known as thanatophoric dysplasia).

Mutated Kinases

Drug resistant kinase mutations can arise in patient populations treated with kinase inhibitors. These occur, in part, in the regions of the protein that bind to or interact with the particular inhibitor used in therapy. Such mutations reduce or increase the capacity of the inhibitor to bind to and inhibit the kinase in question. This can occur at any of the amino acid residues which interact with the inhibitor or are important for supporting the binding of said inhibitor to the target. An inhibitor that binds to a target kinase without requiring the interaction with the mutated amino acid residue will likely be unaffected by the mutation and will remain an effective inhibitor of the enzyme.

A study in gastric cancer patient samples showed the presence of two mutations in FGFR2, Ser167Pro in exon IIIa and a splice site mutation 940-2A-G in exon IIIc. These mutations are identical to the germline activating mutations that cause craniosynotosis syndromes and were observed in 13% of primary gastric cancer tissues studied. In addition activating mutations in FGFR3 were observed in 5% of the patient samples tested and overexpression of FGFRs has been correlated with a poor prognosis in this patient group.

In addition there are chromosomal translocations or point mutations that have been observed in FGFR which give rise to gain-of-function, over-expressed, or constitutively active biological states.

The compounds of the invention would therefore find particular application in relation to cancers which express a mutated molecular target such as FGFR. Diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be performed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RTPCR and FISH.

It has been suggested that mutations of a conserved threonine residue at the ATP binding site of FGFR would result in inhibitor resistance. The amino acid valine 561 has been mutated to a methionine in FGFR1 which corresponds to previously reported mutations found in Abl (T315) and EGFR (T766) that have been shown to confer resistance to selective inhibitors. Assay data for FGFR1 V561M showed that this mutation conferred resistance to a tyrosine kinase inhibitor compared to that of the wild type.

Methods of Diagnosis

Prior to administration of a compound of the formula (I), a patient may be screened to determine whether a disease or condition from which the patient is or may be suffering is one which would be susceptible to treatment with a compound having activity against FGFR, and/or VEGFR.

For example, a biological sample taken from a patient may be analysed to determine whether a condition or disease, such as cancer, that the patient is or may be suffering from is one which is characterised by a genetic abnormality or abnormal protein expression which leads to up-regulation of the levels or activity of FGFR, and/or VEGFR or to sensitisation of a pathway to normal FGFR, and/or VEGFR activity, or to upregulation of these growth factor signalling pathways such as growth factor ligand levels or growth factor ligand activity or to upregulation of a biochemical pathway downstream of FGFR, and/or VEGFR activation.

Examples of such abnormalities that result in activation or sensitisation of the FGFR, and/or VEGFR signal include loss of, or inhibition of apoptotic pathways, up-regulation of the receptors or ligands, or presence of mutant variants of the receptors or ligands e.g PTK variants. Tumours with mutants of FGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4 or up-regulation, in particular over-expression of FGFR1, or gain-of-function mutants of FGFR2 or FGFR3 may be particularly sensitive to FGFR inhibitors.

For example, point mutations engendering gain-of-function in FGFR2 have been identified in a number of conditions. In particular activating mutations in FGFR2 have been identified in 10% of endometrial tumours.

In addition, genetic aberrations of the FGFR3 receptor tyrosine kinase such as chromosomal translocations or point mutations resulting in ectopically expressed or deregulated, constitutively active, FGFR3 receptors have been identified and are linked to a subset of multiple myelomas, bladder and cervical carcinomas. A particular mutation T674I of the PDGF receptor has been identified in imatinib-treated patients. In addition, a gene amplification of 8p12-p11.2 was demonstrated in ˜50% of lobular breast cancer (CLC) cases and this was shown to be linked with an increased expression of FGFR1. Preliminary studies with siRNA directed against FGFR1, or a small molecule inhibitor of the receptor, showed cell lines harbouring this amplification to be particularly sensitive to inhibition of this signalling pathway.

Alternatively, a biological sample taken from a patient may be analysed for loss of a negative regulator or suppressor of FGFR or VEGFR. In the present context, the term “loss” embraces the deletion of a gene encoding the regulator or suppressor, the truncation of the gene (for example by mutation), the truncation of the transcribed product of the gene, or the inactivation of the transcribed product (e.g. by point mutation) or sequestration by another gene product.

The term up-regulation includes elevated expression or over-expression, including gene amplification (i.e. multiple gene copies) and increased expression by a transcriptional effect, and hyperactivity and activation, including activation by mutations. Thus, the patient may be subjected to a diagnostic test to detect a marker characteristic of up-regulation of FGFR, and/or VEGFR. The term diagnosis includes screening. By marker we include genetic markers including, for example, the measurement of DNA composition to identify mutations of FGFR, and/or VEGFR. The term marker also includes markers which are characteristic of up regulation of FGFR and/or VEGFR, including enzyme activity, enzyme levels, enzyme state (e.g. phosphorylated or not) and mRNA levels of the aforementioned proteins.

The diagnostic tests and screens are typically conducted on a biological sample selected from tumour biopsy samples, blood samples (isolation and enrichment of shed tumour cells), stool biopsies, sputum, chromosome analysis, pleural fluid, peritoneal fluid, buccal spears, biopsy or urine.

Methods of identification and analysis of mutations and up-regulation of proteins are known to a person skilled in the art. Screening methods could include, but are not limited to, standard methods such as reverse-transcriptase polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) or in-situ hybridization such as fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH).

Identification of an individual carrying a mutation in FGFR, and/or VEGFR may mean that the patient would be particularly suitable for treatment with a FGFR, and/or VEGFR inhibitor. Tumours may preferentially be screened for presence of a FGFR, and/or VEGFR variant prior to treatment. The screening process will typically involve direct sequencing, oligonucleotide microarray analysis, or a mutant specific antibody. In addition, diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be performed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RT-PCR and FISH.

In addition, mutant forms of, for example FGFR or VEGFR2, can be identified by direct sequencing of, for example, tumour biopsies using PCR and methods to sequence PCR products directly as hereinbefore described. The skilled artisan will recognize that all such well-known techniques for detection of the over expression, activation or mutations of the aforementioned proteins could be applicable in the present case.

In screening by RT-PCR, the level of mRNA in the tumour is assessed by creating a cDNA copy of the mRNA followed by amplification of the cDNA by PCR. Methods of PCR amplification, the selection of primers, and conditions for amplification, are known to a person skilled in the art. Nucleic acid manipulations and PCR are carried out by standard methods, as described for example in Ausubel, F. M. et al., eds. (2004) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons Inc., or Innis, M. A. et al., eds. (1990) PCR Protocols: a guide to methods and applications, Academic Press, San Diego. Reactions and manipulations involving nucleic acid techniques are also described in Sambrook et al., (2001), 3^(rd) Ed, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press. Alternatively a commercially available kit for RT-PCR (for example Roche Molecular Biochemicals) may be used, or methodology as set forth in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,666,828; 4,683,202; 4,801,531; 5,192,659, 5,272,057, 5,882,864, and 6,218,529 and incorporated herein by reference. An example of an in-situ hybridisation technique for assessing mRNA expression would be fluorescence in-situ hybridisation (FISH) (see Angerer (1987) Meth. Enzymol., 152: 649).

Generally, in situ hybridization comprises the following major steps: (1) fixation of tissue to be analyzed; (2) prehybridization treatment of the sample to increase accessibility of target nucleic acid, and to reduce nonspecific binding; (3) hybridization of the mixture of nucleic acids to the nucleic acid in the biological structure or tissue; (4) post-hybridization washes to remove nucleic acid fragments not bound in the hybridization, and (5) detection of the hybridized nucleic acid fragments. The probes used in such applications are typically labelled, for example, with radioisotopes or fluorescent reporters. Preferred probes are sufficiently long, for example, from about 50, 100, or 200 nucleotides to about 1000 or more nucleotides, to enable specific hybridization with the target nucleic acid(s) under stringent conditions. Standard methods for carrying out FISH are described in Ausubel, F. M. et al., eds. (2004) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons Inc and Fluorescence In Situ Hybridization: Technical Overview by John M. S. Bartlett in Molecular Diagnosis of Cancer, Methods and Protocols, 2nd ed.; ISBN: 1-59259-760-2; March 2004, pps. 077-088; Series: Methods in Molecular Medicine.

Methods for gene expression profiling are described by (DePrimo et al. (2003), BMC Cancer, 3:3). Briefly, the protocol is as follows: double-stranded cDNA is synthesized from total RNA Using a (dT)24 oligomer for priming first-strand cDNA synthesis, followed by second strand cDNA synthesis with random hexamer primers. The double-stranded cDNA is used as a template for in vitro transcription of cRNA using biotinylated ribonucleotides. cRNA is chemically fragmented according to protocols described by Affymetrix (Santa Clara, Calif., USA), and then hybridized overnight on Human Genome Arrays.

Alternatively, the protein products expressed from the mRNAs may be assayed by immunohistochemistry of tumour samples, solid phase immunoassay with microtitre plates, Western blotting, 2-dimensional SDS-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, ELISA, flow cytometry and other methods known in the art for detection of specific proteins. Detection methods would include the use of site specific antibodies. The skilled person will recognize that all such well-known techniques for detection of upregulation of FGFR, and/or VEGFR, or detection of FGFR, and/or VEGFR variants or mutants could be applicable in the present case.

Abnormal levels of proteins such as FGFR or VEGFR can be measured using standard enzyme assays, for example, those assays described herein. Activation or overexpression could also be detected in a tissue sample, for example, a tumour tissue. By measuring the tyrosine kinase activity with an assay such as that from Chemicon International. The tyrosine kinase of interest would be immunoprecipitated from the sample lysate and its activity measured.

Alternative methods for the measurement of the over expression or activation of FGFR or VEGFR including the isoforms thereof, include the measurement of microvessel density. This can for example be measured using methods described by Orre and Rogers (Int J Cancer (1999), 84(2) 101-8). Assay methods also include the use of markers, for example, in the case of VEGFR these include CD31, CD34 and CD105.

Therefore all of these techniques could also be used to identify tumours particularly suitable for treatment with the compounds of the invention.

The compounds of the invention are particular useful in treatment of a patient having a mutated FGFR. The G697C mutation in FGFR3 is observed in 62% of oral squamous cell carcmonas and causes constitutive activation of the kinase activity. Activating mutations of FGFR3 have also been identified in bladder carcinoma cases. These mutations were of 6 kinds with varying degrees of prevelence: R248C, S249C, G372C, S373C, Y375C, K652Q. In addition, a Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4 has been found to be associated with increased incidence and aggressiveness of prostate, colon, lung, liver (HCC) and breast cancer.

Therefore in a further aspect the invention includes use of a compound according to the invention for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment or prophylaxis of a disease state or condition in a patient who has been screened and has been determined as suffering from, or being at risk of suffering from, a disease or condition which would be susceptible to treatment with a compound having activity against FGFR.

Particular mutations a patient is screened for include G697C, R248C, S249C, G372C, S373C, Y375C, K652Q mutations in FGFR3 and Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4.

In another aspect the invention includes a compound of the invention for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer in a patient selected from a sub-population possessing a variant of the FGFR gene (for example G697C mutation in FGFR3 and Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4).

MRI determination of vessel normalization (e.g. using MRI gradient echo, spin echo, and contrast enhancement to measure blood volume, relative vessel size, and vascular permeability) in combination with circulating biomarkers (circulating progenitor cells (CPCs), CECs, SDF1, and FGF2) may also be used to identify VEGFR2-resistant tumours for treatment with a compound of the invention.

Pharmaceutical Compositions and Combinations

In view of their useful pharmacological properties, the subject compounds may be formulated into various pharmaceutical forms for administration purposes.

In one embodiment the pharmaceutical composition (e.g. formulation) comprises at least one active compound of the invention together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants, excipients, diluents, fillers, buffers, stabilisers, preservatives, lubricants, or other materials well known to those skilled in the art and optionally other therapeutic or prophylactic agents.

To prepare the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention, an effective amount of a compound of the present invention, as the active ingredient is combined in intimate admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, which carrier may take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration. The pharmaceutical compositions can be in any form suitable for oral, parenteral, topical, intranasal, ophthalmic, otic, rectal, intra-vaginal, or transdermal administration. These pharmaceutical compositions are desirably in unitary dosage form suitable, preferably, for administration orally, rectally, percutaneously, or by parenteral injection. For example, in preparing the compositions in oral dosage form, any of the usual pharmaceutical media may be employed, such as, for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations such as suspensions, syrups, elixirs and solutions; or solid carriers such as starches, sugars, kaolin, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case of powders, pills, capsules and tablets.

Because of their ease in administration, tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit form, in which case solid pharmaceutical carriers are obviously employed. For parenteral compositions, the carrier will usually comprise sterile water, at least in large part, though other ingredients, to aid solubility for example, may be included. Injectable solutions, for example, may be prepared in which the carrier comprises saline solution, glucose solution or a mixture of saline and glucose solution. Injectable suspensions may also be prepared in which case appropriate liquid carriers, suspending agents and the like may be employed. In the compositions suitable for percutaneous administration, the carrier optionally comprises a penetration enhancing agent and/or a suitable wetting agent, optionally combined with suitable additives of any nature in minor proportions, which additives do not cause a significant deleterious effect to the skin. Said additives may facilitate the administration to the skin and/or may be helpful for preparing the desired compositions. These compositions may be administered in various ways, e.g., as a transdermal patch, as a spot-on, as an ointment. It is especially advantageous to formulate the aforementioned pharmaceutical compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used in the specification and claims herein refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active ingredient calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. Examples of such dosage unit forms are tablets (including scored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powder packets, wafers, injectable solutions or suspensions, teaspoonfuls, tablespoonfuls and the like, and segregated multiples thereof.

It is especially advantageous to formulate the aforementioned pharmaceutical compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used in the specification and claims herein refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active ingredient, calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. Examples of such dosage unit forms are tablets (including scored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powder packets, wafers, injectable solutions or suspensions, teaspoonfuls, tablespoonfuls and the like, and segregated multiples thereof.

The compound of the invention is administered in an amount sufficient to exert its anti-tumour activity.

Those skilled in the art could easily determine the effective amount from the test results presented hereinafter. In general it is contemplated that a therapeutically effective amount would be from 0.005 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg body weight, and in particular from 0.005 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg body weight. It may be appropriate to administer the required dose as single, two, three, four or more sub-doses at appropriate intervals throughout the day. Said sub-doses may be formulated as unit dosage forms, for example, containing 0.5 to 500 mg, in particular 1 mg to 500 mg, more in particular 10 mg to 500 mg of active ingredient per unit dosage form.

Depending on the mode of administration, the pharmaceutical composition will preferably comprise from 0.05 to 99% by weight, more preferably from 0.1 to 70% by weight, even more preferably from 0.1 to 50% by weight of the compound of the present invention, and, from 1 to 99.95% by weight, more preferably from 30 to 99.9% by weight, even more preferably from 50 to 99.9% by weight of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, all percentages being based on the total weight of the composition.

As another aspect of the present invention, a combination of a compound of the present invention with another anticancer agent is envisaged, especially for use as a medicine, more specifically for use in the treatment of cancer or related diseases.

For the treatment of the above conditions, the compounds of the invention may be advantageously employed in combination with one or more other medicinal agents, more particularly, with other anti-cancer agents or adjuvants in cancer therapy. Examples of anti-cancer agents or adjuvants (supporting agents in the therapy) include but are not limited to:

-   -   platinum coordination compounds for example cisplatin optionally         combined with amifostine, carboplatin or oxaliplatin;     -   taxane compounds for example paclitaxel, paclitaxel protein         bound particles (Abraxane™) or docetaxel;     -   topoisomerase I inhibitors such as camptothecin compounds for         example irinotecan, SN-38, topotecan, topotecan hcl;     -   topoisomerase II inhibitors such as anti-tumour         epipodophyllotoxins or podophyllotoxin derivatives for example         etoposide, etoposide phosphate or teniposide;     -   anti-tumour vinca alkaloids for example vinblastine, vincristine         or vinorelbine;     -   anti-tumour nucleoside derivatives for example 5-fluorouracil,         leucovorin, gemcitabine, gemcitabine hcl, capecitabine,         cladribine, fludarabine, nelarabine;     -   alkylating agents such as nitrogen mustard or nitrosourea for         example cyclophosphamide, chlorambucil, carmustine, thiotepa,         mephalan (melphalan), lomustine, altretamine, busulfan,         dacarbazine, estramustine, ifosfamide optionally in combination         with mesna, pipobroman, procarbazine, streptozocin,         telozolomide, uracil;     -   anti-tumour anthracycline derivatives for example daunorubicin,         doxorubicin optionally in combination with dexrazoxane, doxil,         idarubicin, mitoxantrone, epirubicin, epirubicin hcl,         valrubicin;     -   molecules that target the IGF-1 receptor for example         picropodophilin;     -   tetracarcin derivatives for example tetrocarcin A;     -   glucocorticoïden for example prednisone;     -   antibodies for example trastuzumab (HER2 antibody), rituximab         (CD20 antibody), gemtuzumab, gemtuzumab ozogamicin, cetuximab,         pertuzumab, bevacizumab, alemtuzumab, eculizumab, ibritumomab         tiuxetan, nofetumomab, panitumumab, tositumomab, CNTO 328;     -   estrogen receptor antagonists or selective estrogen receptor         modulators or inhibitors of estrogen synthesis for example         tamoxifen, fulvestrant, toremifene, droloxifene, faslodex,         raloxifene or letrozole;     -   aromatase inhibitors such as exemestane, anastrozole, letrazole,         testolactone and vorozole;     -   differentiating agents such as retinoids, vitamin D or retinoic         acid and retinoic acid metabolism blocking agents (RAMBA) for         example accutane;     -   DNA methyl transferase inhibitors for example azacytidine or         decitabine;     -   antifolates for example premetrexed disodium;     -   antibiotics for example antinomycin D, bleomycin, mitomycin C,         dactinomycin, carminomycin, daunomycin, levamisole, plicamycin,         mithramycin;     -   antimetabolites for example clofarabine, aminopterin, cytosine         arabinoside or methotrexate, azacitidine, cytarabine,         floxuridine, pentostatin, thioguanine;     -   apoptosis inducing agents and antiangiogenic agents such as         Bcl-2 inhibitors for example YC 137, BH 312, ABT 737, gossypol,         HA 14-1, TW 37 or decanoic acid;     -   tubuline-binding agents for example combrestatin, colchicines or         nocodazole;     -   kinase inhibitors (e.g. EGFR (epithelial growth factor receptor)         inhibitors, MTKI (multi target kinase inhibitors), mTOR         inhibitors) for example flavoperidol, imatinib mesylate,         erlotinib, gefitinib, dasatinib, lapatinib, lapatinib         ditosylate, sorafenib, sunitinib, sunitinib maleate,         temsirolimus;     -   farnesyltransferase inhibitors for example tipifarnib;     -   histone deacetylase (HDAC) inhibitors for example sodium         butyrate, suberoylanilide hydroxamide acid (SAHA), depsipeptide         (FR 901228), NVP-LAQ824, R306465, JNJ-26481585, trichostatin A,         vorinostat;     -   Inhibitors of the ubiquitin-proteasome pathway for example         PS-341, MLN 0.41 or bortezomib;     -   Yondelis;     -   Telomerase inhibitors for example telomestatin;     -   Matrix metalloproteinase inhibitors for example batimastat,         marimastat, prinostat or metastat.     -   Recombinant interleukins for example aldesleukin, denileukin         diftitox, interferon alfa 2a, interferon alfa 2b, peginterferon         alfa 2b     -   MAPK inhibitors     -   Retinoids for example alitretinoin, bexarotene, tretinoin     -   Arsenic trioxide     -   Asparaginase     -   Steroids for example dromostanolone propionate, megestrol         acetate, nandrolone (decanoate, phenpropionate), dexamethasone     -   Gonadotropin releasing hormone agonists or antagonists for         example abarelix, goserelin acetate, histrelin acetate,         leuprolide acetate     -   Thalidomide, lenalidomide     -   Mercaptopurine, mitotane, pamidronate, pegademase, pegaspargase,         rasburicase     -   BH3 mimetics for example ABT-737     -   MEK inhibitors for example PD98059, AZD6244, CI-1040     -   colony-stimulating factor analogs for example filgrastim,         pegfilgrastim, sargramostim; erythropoietin or analogues thereof         (e.g. darbepoetin alfa); interleukin 11; oprelvekin;         zoledronate, zoledronic acid; fentanyl; bisphosphonate;         palifermin.     -   a steroidal cytochrome P450 17alpha-hydroxylase-17,20-lyase         inhibitor (CYP17), e.g. abiraterone, abiraterone acetate.

The compounds of the present invention also have therapeutic applications in sensitising tumour cells for radiotherapy and chemotherapy.

Hence the compounds of the present invention can be used as “radiosensitizer” and/or “chemosensitizer” or can be given in combination with another “radiosensitizer” and/or “chemosensitizer”.

The term “radiosensitizer”, as used herein, is defined as a molecule, preferably a low molecular weight molecule, administered to animals in therapeutically effective amounts to increase the sensitivity of the cells to ionizing radiation and/or to promote the treatment of diseases which are treatable with ionizing radiation.

The term “chemosensitizer”, as used herein, is defined as a molecule, preferably a low molecular weight molecule, administered to animals in therapeutically effective amounts to increase the sensitivity of cells to chemotherapy and/or promote the treatment of diseases which are treatable with chemotherapeutics.

Several mechanisms for the mode of action of radiosensitizers have been suggested in the literature including: hypoxic cell radiosensitizers (e.g., 2-nitroimidazole compounds, and benzotriazine dioxide compounds) mimicking oxygen or alternatively behave like bioreductive agents under hypoxia; non-hypoxic cell radiosensitizers (e.g., halogenated pyrimidines) can be analogoues of DNA bases and preferentially incorporate into the DNA of cancer cells and thereby promote the radiation-induced breaking of DNA molecules and/or prevent the normal DNA repair mechanisms; and various other potential mechanisms of action have been hypothesized for radiosensitizers in the treatment of disease.

Many cancer treatment protocols currently employ radiosensitizers in conjunction with radiation of x-rays. Examples of x-ray activated radiosensitizers include, but are not limited to, the following: metronidazole, misonidazole, desmethylmisonidazole, pimonidazole, etanidazole, nimorazole, mitomycin C, RSU 1069, SR 4233, EO9, RB 6145, nicotinamide, 5-bromodeoxyuridine (BUdR), 5-iododeoxyuridine (IUdR), bromodeoxycytidine, fluorodeoxyuridine (FudR), hydroxyurea, cisplatin, and therapeutically effective analogs and derivatives of the same.

Photodynamic therapy (PDT) of cancers employs visible light as the radiation activator of the sensitizing agent. Examples of photodynamic radiosensitizers include the following, but are not limited to: hematoporphyrin derivatives, Photofrin, benzoporphyrin derivatives, tin etioporphyrin, pheoborbide-a, bacteriochlorophyll-a, naphthalocyanines, phthalocyanines, zinc phthalocyanine, and therapeutically effective analogs and derivatives of the same.

Radiosensitizers may be administered in conjunction with a therapeutically effective amount of one or more other compounds, including but not limited to: compounds which promote the incorporation of radiosensitizers to the target cells; compounds which control the flow of therapeutics, nutrients, and/or oxygen to the target cells; chemotherapeutic agents which act on the tumour with or without additional radiation; or other therapeutically effective compounds for treating cancer or other diseases.

Chemosensitizers may be administered in conjunction with a therapeutically effective amount of one or more other compounds, including but not limited to: compounds which promote the incorporation of chemosensitizers to the target cells; compounds which control the flow of therapeutics, nutrients, and/or oxygen to the target cells; chemotherapeutic agents which act on the tumour or other therapeutically effective compounds for treating cancer or other disease. Calcium antagonists, for example verapamil, are found useful in combination with antineoplastic agents to establish chemosensitivity in tumor cells resistant to accepted chemotherapeutic agents and to potentiate the efficacy of such compounds in drug-sensitive malignancies.

In view of their useful pharmacological properties, the components of the combinations according to the invention, i.e. the one or more other medicinal agent and the compound according to the present invention may be formulated into various pharmaceutical forms for administration purposes. The components may be formulated separately in individual pharmaceutical compositions or in a unitary pharmaceutical composition containing all components.

The present invention therefore also relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising the one or more other medicinal agent and the compound according to the present invention together with a pharmaceutical carrier.

The present invention further relates to the use of a combination according to the invention in the manufacture of a pharmaceutical composition for inhibiting the growth of tumour cells.

The present invention further relates to a product containing as first active ingredient a compound according to the invention and as further active ingredient one or more anticancer agent, as a combined preparation for simultaneous, separate or sequential use in the treatment of patients suffering from cancer.

The one or more other medicinal agents and the compound according to the present invention may be administered simultaneously (e.g. in separate or unitary compositions) or sequentially in either order. In the latter case, the two or more compounds will be administered within a period and in an amount and manner that is sufficient to ensure that an advantageous or synergistic effect is achieved. It will be appreciated that the preferred method and order of administration and the respective dosage amounts and regimes for each component of the combination will depend on the particular other medicinal agent and compound of the present invention being administered, their route of administration, the particular tumour being treated and the particular host being treated. The optimum method and order of administration and the dosage amounts and regime can be readily determined by those skilled in the art using conventional methods and in view of the information set out herein.

The weight ratio of the compound according to the present invention and the one or more other anticancer agent(s) when given as a combination may be determined by the person skilled in the art. Said ratio and the exact dosage and frequency of administration depends on the particular compound according to the invention and the other anticancer agent(s) used, the particular condition being treated, the severity of the condition being treated, the age, weight, gender, diet, time of administration and general physical condition of the particular patient, the mode of administration as well as other medication the individual may be taking, as is well known to those skilled in the art. Furthermore, it is evident that the effective daily amount may be lowered or increased depending on the response of the treated subject and/or depending on the evaluation of the physician prescribing the compounds of the instant invention. A particular weight ratio for the present compound of formula (I) and another anticancer agent may range from 1/10 to 10/1, more in particular from 1/5 to 5/1, even more in particular from 1/3 to 3/1.

The platinum coordination compound is advantageously administered in a dosage of 1 to 500 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, for example 50 to 400 mg/m², particularly for cisplatin in a dosage of about 75 mg/m² and for carboplatin in about 300 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The taxane compound is advantageously administered in a dosage of 50 to 400 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, for example 75 to 250 mg/m², particularly for paclitaxel in a dosage of about 175 to 250 mg/m² and for docetaxel in about 75 to 150 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The camptothecin compound is advantageously administered in a dosage of 0.1 to 400 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, for example 1 to 300 mg/m², particularly for irinotecan in a dosage of about 100 to 350 mg/m² and for topotecan in about 1 to 2 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The anti-tumour podophyllotoxin derivative is advantageously administered in a dosage of 30 to 300 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, for example 50 to 250 mg/m², particularly for etoposide in a dosage of about 35 to 100 mg/m² and for teniposide in about 50 to 250 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The anti-tumour vinca alkaloid is advantageously administered in a dosage of 2 to 30 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, particularly for vinblastine in a dosage of about 3 to 12 mg/m², for vincristine in a dosage of about 1 to 2 mg/m², and for vinorelbine in dosage of about 10 to 30 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The anti-tumour nucleoside derivative is advantageously administered in a dosage of 200 to 2500 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, for example 700 to 1500 mg/m², particularly for 5-FU in a dosage of 200 to 500 mg/m², for gemcitabine in a dosage of about 800 to 1200 mg/m² and for capecitabine in about 1000 to 2500 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The alkylating agents such as nitrogen mustard or nitrosourea is advantageously administered in a dosage of 100 to 500 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, for example 120 to 200 mg/m², particularly for cyclophosphamide in a dosage of about 100 to 500 mg/m², for chlorambucil in a dosage of about 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg, for carmustine in a dosage of about 150 to 200 mg/m², and for lomustine in a dosage of about 100 to 150 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The anti-tumour anthracycline derivative is advantageously administered in a dosage of 10 to 75 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, for example 15 to 60 mg/m², particularly for doxorubicin in a dosage of about 40 to 75 mg/m², for daunorubicin in a dosage of about 25 to 45 mg/m², and for idarubicin in a dosage of about 10 to 15 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The antiestrogen agent is advantageously administered in a dosage of about 1 to 100 mg daily depending on the particular agent and the condition being treated. Tamoxifen is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of 5 to 50 mg, preferably 10 to 20 mg twice a day, continuing the therapy for sufficient time to achieve and maintain a therapeutic effect. Toremifene is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 60 mg once a day, continuing the therapy for sufficient time to achieve and maintain a therapeutic effect. Anastrozole is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 1 mg once a day. Droloxifene is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 20-100 mg once a day. Raloxifene is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 60 mg once a day. Exemestane is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 25 mg once a day.

Antibodies are advantageously administered in a dosage of about 1 to 5 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, or as known in the art, if different. Trastuzumab is advantageously administered in a dosage of 1 to 5 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, particularly 2 to 4 mg/m² per course of treatment.

These dosages may be administered for example once, twice or more per course of treatment, which may be repeated for example every 7, 14, 21 or 28 days.

The compounds of formula (I), the pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts, in particular pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts, and stereoisomeric forms thereof can have valuable diagnostic properties in that they can be used for detecting or identifying the formation of a complex between a labelled compound and other molecules, peptides, proteins, enzymes or receptors.

The detecting or identifying methods can use compounds that are labelled with labelling agents such as radioisotopes, enzymes, fluorescent substances, luminous substances, etc. Examples of the radioisotopes include ¹²⁵I, ¹³¹I, ³H and ¹⁴C. Enzymes are usually made detectable by conjugation of an appropriate substrate which, in turn catalyses a detectable reaction. Examples thereof include, for example, beta-galactosidase, beta-glucosidase, alkaline phosphatase, peroxidase and malate dehydrogenase, preferably horseradish peroxidase. The luminous substances include, for example, luminol, luminol derivatives, luciferin, aequorin and luciferase.

Biological samples can be defined as body tissue or body fluids. Examples of body fluids are cerebrospinal fluid, blood, plasma, serum, urine, sputum, saliva and the like.

General Synthetic Routes

The following examples illustrate the present invention but are examples only and are not intended to limit the scope of the claims in any way.

Hereinafter, the term, ‘brine’ means saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, ‘CO₂’ means carbon dioxide, ‘CH₃CN’ means acetonitrile, ‘DCM’ means dichloromethane, ‘DiPE’ means diisopropyl ether, ‘DMF’ means N,N-dimethylformamide, ‘DMSO’ means dimethyl sulfoxide, ‘Et₂O’ means diethyl ether, ‘EtOAc’ means ethyl acetate ‘EtOH’ means ethanol, ‘H₂’ means hydrogen, ‘HCl’ means hydrochloric acid ‘K₂CO₃’ means potassium carbonate, ‘NaH’ means sodium hydride, ‘NaHCO₃’ means sodium bicarbonate, ‘MgSO₄’ means magnesium sulphate, ‘MeOH’ means methanol, ‘MP’ means melting point, ‘N₂’ means nitrogen, ‘NH₄OH’ means ammonium hydroxide, ‘THF’ means tetrahydrofuran, ‘SiOH’ means silica, “r.t.” means retention time, “M.P.” means melting point, ‘DIPEA’ means diisopropylethylamine; ‘Pd/C’ means Palladium on charcoal.

A. Preparation of the Intermediate Compounds EXAMPLE A1 a) Preparation of Intermediate 1

3,5-dimethoxy-2,6-difluoroaniline (9.21 g; 48.70 mmol) was heated at 100° C. and 2-chloro-5-nitropyrimidin-4-amine (CAS 1920-66-7) (3.4 g; 19.48 mmol) was added rapidly. The heating was continued for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, diluted with DCM and basified with a saturated NaHCO₃ solution. The insoluble material was filtered, washed with water, DCM/MeOH, then Et₂O and dried, yielding 7.8 g (>100%) of intermediate 1.

This intermediate was used without further purification in the next step.

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 5.21) 328 (100) [M+H]⁺, 655 (15) [2M+H]⁺ (method A2).

b) Preparation of Intermediate 2

A mixture of intermediate 1 (7.08 g; 19.48 mmol) and Raney Nickel (7 g) in THF (150 mL) and MeOH (150 mL) was hydrogenated at room temperature under 1 atmosphere of H₂ for 18 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtration over a pad of Celite® and the filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from CH₃CN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with CH₃CN, then Et₂O and dried, yielding 2.33 g (40%) of intermediate 2.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 7.58-8.46 (m, 2H), 6.90-7.15 (m, 1H), 6.79 (t, J=8.08 Hz, 1H), 6.47 (br. s., 2H), 3.84 (s, 6H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 5.45) 298 (100) [M+H]⁺, 595 (5) [2M+H]⁺ (method A1).

c) Preparation of Intermediate 3

2-Bromo-1-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-ethanone (CAS 706819-66-1) (820 mg; 4.04 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 2 (1 g; 3.36 mmol) and K₂CO₃ (930 mg; 6.73 mmol) in DMF (20 mL). The reaction mixture was heated at 65° C. for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH 40 g; mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.5% NH₄OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness, yielding 345 mg (25%) of intermediate 3.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.78 (s, 1H), 9.27 (s, 1H), 9.09 (s, 1H), 8.71 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, 1H), 7.01 (t, J=7.88 Hz, 1H), 3.79-4.05 (m, 9H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 2.34) 400 (100) [M+H]⁺, 799 (95) [2M+H]⁺ (method B1).

M.P.: 224° C. (Kofler).

EXAMPLE A2 a) Preparation of Intermediate 4

3,5-dimethoxyaniline (59.9 g; 0.39 mol) was heated at 100° C. (melting) and 2-chloro-5-nitropyrimidin-4-amine (CAS 1920-66-7) (13.65 g; 78.20 mmol) was added rapidly. The heating was continued for 10 minutes. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and poured onto DCM and saturated NaHCO₃ solution. The insoluble material was filtered, washed with water, DCM/MeOH, then Et₂O and dried, yielding 20.2 g (88%) of intermediate 4. This intermediate was used as it is for the next step.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.66-10.49 (m, 1H), 8.97 (s, 1H), 8.04-8.69 (m, 2H), 7.09 (s, 2H), 6.21 (s, 1H), 3.74 (s, 6H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 5.66) 292 (100) [M+H]⁺ (method A2).

b) Preparation of Intermediate 5

A mixture of intermediate 4 (3 g; 9.27 mmol) and Raney Nickel (3 g) in THF (62.5 mL) and MeOH (62.5 mL) was hydrogenated at room temperature under 1 atmosphere of H₂ for 18 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtration over a pad of Celite® and the filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 80 g; mobile phase: 97% DCM, 3% MeOH, 0.1% NH₄OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness, yielding 1.9 g (78%) of intermediate 5.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.35 (s, 1H), 7.41 (s, 1H), 7.00 (d, J=2.02 Hz, 2H), 6.18 (s, 2H), 5.94 (t, J=2.27 Hz, 1H), 4.08 (s, 2H), 3.68 (s, 6H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 4.16) 262 (100) [M+H]⁺ (method A2).

c) Preparation of Intermediate 6

A mixture of intermediate 5 (990 mg; 3.79 mmol), 2-bromo-1-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-ethanone (CAS 706819-66-1) (1 g; 4.93 mmol) and NaHCO₃ (699 mg; 8.33 mmol) in dioxane (40 mL) and water (40 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours and refluxed for 18 hours more. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature. The precipitate was filtered, washed with CH₃CN, then Et₂O and dried, yielding 640 mg (46%) of intermediate 6.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 10.23 (s, 1H), 9.29 (s, 1H), 9.11 (s, 1H), 8.74 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 7.30 (s, 2H), 6.26 (t, J=2.05 Hz, 1H), 3.96 (s, 3H), 3.77 (s, 6H); MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (tr 2.46) 364 (100) [M+H]⁺, 727 (35) [2M+H]⁺ (method B1).

M.P.: 240° C. (Kofler).

d) Preparation of Intermediate 7

NaH (22 mg; 0.55 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of intermediate 6 (100 mg; 0.28 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) at 5° C. under N₂ flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5° C. for 30 minutes, then (2-bromoethoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane (118 μL; 0.55 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 12 g; mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.5% NH₄OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness, yielding 63 mg (44%) of intermediate 7.

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 4.45) 522 (100) [M+H]⁺ (method A1).

EXAMPLE A3 a) Preparation of Intermediate 8

A mixture of intermediate 5 (7 g; 26.79 mmol) in water (400 mL), toluene (200 mL) and MeOH (100 mL) was refluxed and phenyl glyoxal hydrate (3.59 g; 26.79 mmol) was added. The reflux was maintained for 4 hours more. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and the precipitate was filtered off, washed with MeOH, then CH₃CN and dried, yielding 6 g (62%) of intermediate 8. The filtrate was washed with water, then brine and the organic layer was decanted, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (3.25 g) was taken up with hot CH₃CN under stirring. The precipitate was filtered off and dried, yielding 2.2 g (23%) of residue (not pure). A part of the residue (500 mg) was purified by achiral Super critical fluid chromatography on (AMINO 6 μm 150×21.2 mm; mobile phase: 90% CO₂, 10% EtOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness, yielding 415 mg (yellow solid) which was taken up with Et₂O. The precipitate was filtered off and dried, yielding additional 379 mg (4%) of intermediate 8.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 10.35 (s, 1H), 9.43 (s, 1H), 9.41 (s, 1H), 8.37 (dd, J=2.84, 5.99 Hz, 2H), 7.54-7.76 (m, 3H), 7.34 (br. s., 2H), 6.27 (s, 1H), 3.78 (s, 6H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 3.71) 360 (100) [M+H]⁺, 719 (100) [2M+H]⁺ (method A4);

M.P.: 198° C. (DSC).

b) Preparation of Intermediate 9

The reaction was performed three times on the same quantities (1 g; 2.78 mmol): NaH (222 mg; 5.57 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of intermediate 8 (1 g; 2.78 mmol) and (2-bromoethoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane (1.78 mL; 8.35 mmol) in THF (10 mL) and DMF (10 mL) at 5° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. All the reaction mixtures were combined for the work up. The resulting mixture was quenched with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (8 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40 μm 300 g; mobile phase: 96% DCM, 4% EtOAc). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness, yielding 3 g (69%) of intermediate 9.

(¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.12-9.40 (m, 2H), 8.27-8.42 (m, 2H), 7.46-7.67 (m, 3H), 6.59 (d, J=2.21 Hz, 2H), 6.49 (t, J=2.21 Hz, 1H), 4.18 (t, J=6.15 Hz, 2H), 3.94 (t, J=6.15 Hz, 2H), 3.75 (s, 6H), 0.79 (s, 9H), 0.01 (s, 6H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 7.70) 518 (100) [M+H]⁺ (method A3).

EXAMPLE A4 a) Preparation of Intermediate 10

2-Fluoro-3,5-dimethoxyphenylamine (CAS: 651734-61-1) (30 g; 175.26 mmol) was heated at 100° C. and 4-amino-2-chloro-5-nitropyrimidine (15.3 g; 87.6 mmol) was added rapidly. The heating was continued for 3 hours. The reaction was cooled to room temperature and diluted with DCM. The insoluble material was filtered off, washed with water, a mixture of DCM/MeOH, DIPE and dried to afford 19 g (63%) of intermediate 10.

b) Preparation of Intermediate 11

A mixture of intermediate 10 (19 g; 61.44 mmol) and Pd/C (19 g, 10% loading) in THF (250 mL) and MeOH (250 mL) was hydrogenated at room temperature overnight under 3.5 atm of H₂. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give 16.03 g (94%) of intermediate 11.

c) Preparation of Intermediate 12

2-bromo-1-(1-methyl-1-H-pyrazole-4-yl)-ethanone (CAS: 706819-66-1) (2.6 g; 12.89 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 11 (3 g; 10.74 mmol) and K₂CO₃ (3 g; 21.48 mmol) in DMF (60 mL). The reaction mixture was heated at 65° C. for 18 hours, then cooled to room temperature, poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (3 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH 40 g; mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.1% NH₄OH). The fractions containing the product were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 280 mg (7%) of intermediate 12.

Alternatively, intermediate 12 was also prepared according to the following procedure:

A mixture of intermediate 11 (3 g; 10.74 mmol), 2-bromo-1-(1-methyl-1-H-pyrazole-4-yl))-ethanone (CAS: 706819-66-1) (2.2 g; 10.74 mmol) and DIPEA (3.7 mL; 21.48 mmol) in CH₃CN (40 mL) was heated at 90° C. for 18 hours.

The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (4 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 20-45 μm, 450 g; mobile phase: 0.1% NH₄OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The fractions containing the product were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 420 mg (10%) of intermediate 12.

B. Preparation of the Final Compounds EXAMPLE B1 Preparation of Compound 1

NaH (64 mg; 1.60 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of intermediate 3 (319 mg; 0.80 mmol) in DMF (8 mL) at 5° C. under N₂ flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5° C. for 30 minutes, then 2-(chloromethyl)-N,N-dimethyl-1H-imidazole-1-sulfonamide (CAS 935862-81-0) (343 mg; 1.53 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred all over the week end. The reaction mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (590 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Silica 5 μm 150×30.0 mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH₄OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.7% NH₄OH, 93% DCM, 7% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (220 mg, 47%) was taken up with CH₃CN and the precipitate was filtered and dried, yielding 190 mg (40%) of compound 1.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.23 (br. s., 1H), 9.09 (s, 1H), 8.63 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 7.46 (s, 1H), 7.00 (t, J=7.83 Hz, 1H), 6.92 (s, 1H), 5.54 (s, 2H), 3.96 (s, 3H), 3.89 (s, 6H), 2.99 (s, 6H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 2.60) 587 (100) [M+H]⁺ (method B1);

M.P.: 230° C. (Kofler).

EXAMPLE B2 Preparation of Compound 3

Tetrabutylammonium fluoride (0.12 mL; 0.12 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of intermediate 7 (63 mg; 0.12 mmol) in THF (6 mL) at 10° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (76 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Silica 5 μm 150×30.0 mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH₄OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1.1% NH₄OH, 89% DCM, 11% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness, yielding 15 mg (30%) of compound 3;

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.15 (s, 1H), 9.03 (s, 1H), 8.73 (s, 1H), 8.33 (s, 1H), 6.58 (d, J=2.21 Hz, 2H), 6.48 (t, J=2.21 Hz, 1H), 4.84 (t, J=5.20 Hz, 1H), 4.08 (t, J=6.46 Hz, 2H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 3.75 (s, 6H), 3.67-3.73 (m, 2H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 2.24) 408 (100) [M+H]⁺, 815 (40) [2M+H]⁺ (method B1).

M.P.: 200° C. (Kofler).

EXAMPLE B3 Preparation of Compound 4

A mixture of intermediate 9 (3 g; 5.80 mmol) and tetrabutylammonium fluoride (6.95 mL; 6.95 mmol) in THF (90 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc and quenched with water. The organic layer was decanted, washed with water, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to until crystallization. The precipitate was filtered off and dried yielding 1.42 g (61%) of compound 4. The filtrate was evaporated to dryness and the residue (1.7 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40 μm 300 g; mobile phase: 0.1% NH₄OH, 98.5% DCM, 1.5% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from CH₃CN/DiPE. The precipitate was filtered off and dried, yielding, additional 308 mg (13%) of compound 4.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.16-9.41 (m, 2H), 8.34 (d, J=4.41 Hz, 2H), 7.38-7.71 (m, 3H), 6.61 (d, J=1.26 Hz, 2H), 6.49 (br. s., 1H), 4.86 (t, J=5.20 Hz, 1H), 4.13 (t, J=6.31 Hz, 2H), 3.65-3.84 (m, 8H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 3.47) 404 (100) [M+H]⁺, 807 (30) [2M+H]⁺ (method B2);

M.P.: 210° C. (DSC).

EXAMPLE B4 Preparation of Compound 5

NaH (110 mg; 2.75 mmol) was added portionwise to a solution of intermediate 6 (500 mg; 1.38 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 5° C. under N₂ flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5° C. for 30 minutes, then 2-(chloromethyl)-N,N-dimethyl-1H-imidazole-1-sulfonamide (CAS 935862-81-0) (590 mg; 2.64 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred all over the week end. The reaction mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was taken up with CH₃CN and the precipitate was filtered and dried, yielding 400 mg (23%) of compound 5.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.17 (s, 1H), 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.65 (s, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 7.57 (s, 1H), 6.98 (s, 1H), 6.77 (d, J=1.89 Hz, 2H), 6.48 (s, 1H), 5.42 (s, 2H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 3.73 (s, 6H), 3.04 (br. s., 6H).

M.P.: 206° C. (Kofler).

EXAMPLE B5 Preparation of Compound 6

NaH (33 mg; 0.84 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of intermediate 8 (150 mg; 0.42 mmol) in THF (1.5 mL) and DMF (1.5 mL) at 5° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5° C. for 20 minutes, then 1-bromo-3-chloropropane was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was quenched with iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness, yielding 195 mg (>100%) of compound 6.

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 6.58) 436 (100) [M+H]⁺, 871 (30) [2M+H]⁺ (method A3).

EXAMPLE B6 Preparation of Compound 7

The reaction was performed twice on the same quantities (500 mg; 1.39 mmol): NaH (61 mg; 1.53 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of intermediate 8 (500 mg; 1.39 mmol) and (bromomethyl)cyclopropane in THF (5 mL) and DMF (5 mL) at 5° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. All the reactions mixtures were combined for the work up. The resulting mixture was quenched with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (1.1 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40 μm 300 g; mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% EtOAc). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness, yielding 500 mg (43%) which was taken up with Et₂O/DiPE. The precipitate was filtered off and dried, yielding 454 mg (39%) of compound 7.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.19-9.43 (m, 2H), 8.20-8.48 (m, 2H), 7.38-7.72 (m, 3H), 6.38-6.68 (m, 3H), 3.97 (d, J=6.94 Hz, 2H), 3.76 (s, 6H), 1.12-1.31 (m, 1H), 0.38-0.54 (m, 2H), 0.09-0.28 (m, 2H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 4.59) 414 (100) [M+H]⁺, 827 (70) [2M+H]⁺ (method B2);

EXAMPLE B7 Preparation of Compound 8

NaH (85 mg; 2.13 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 3 (340 mg; 0.85 mmol) in DMF (6 mL) at 5° C. under N₂ flow. The reaction was stirred at 5° C. for 30 minutes. A solution of (S)-5-(Hydroxy-methyl)-2-pyrrolidinone p-toluenesulfonate (CAS 51693-17-5) (573 mg; 2.13 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added at 5° C. under N₂ flow over a 2 hours period. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine (twice), dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (500 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular 15-40 μm; 30 g; mobile phase: 0.2% NH₄OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (200 mg) was crystallized from CH₃CN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with Et₂O and dried yielding 170 mg (40%) of compound 8.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆, 360K) δ 9.22 (br. s., 1H), 9.08 (s, 1H), 8.66 (s, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 7.22 (br. s., 1H), 7.07 (t, J=8.08 Hz, 1H), 4.15-4.29 (m, 1H), 4.00-4.13 (m, 1H), 3.85-3.99 (m, 10H), 2.06-2.25 (m, 3H), 1.76-1.99 (m, 1H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 2.24) 497 (100) [M+H]⁺, 993 (35) [2M+H]⁺ (method B1);

M.P.: 248° C. (Kofler).

EXAMPLE B8 Preparation of Compound 9

Intermediate 3 (250 mg; 0.63 mmol) and tetrabutylammonium bromide (80.7 mg; 0.25 mmol) were added at room temperature to a solution of potassium hydroxide (619.8 mg; 9.39 mmol) in THF (4.5 mL) and water (0.5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 50° C. for 1 hour and (2-chloroethyl)-methylamine (81.4 mg; 0.62 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 24 hours at 50° C.

1 additional equivalent of (2-chloroethyl)-methylamine (81.4 mg; 0.62 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was heated at 50° C. for 2 more hours. This operation was repeated.

The reaction mixture was cooled down to room temperature, poured into a 10% aqueous solution of K₂CO₃ and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water (3×150 mL) then brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (350 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH₄OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1.2% NH₄OH, 88% DCM, 12% MeOH). The fractions containing the product were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 29 mg (10%) of compound 9.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆, 360K) δ 9.21 (br. s, 1H), 9.06 (s, 1H), 8.66 (s, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 7.06 (t, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 4.10 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 3.96 (s, 3H), 3.93 (s, 6H), 2.86 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.34 (s, 3H)

m/z (%) (tr 2.00) 457 (100) [M+H]⁺ (method B1).

M.P.: 106° C. (Kofler).

EXAMPLE B9 Preparation of Compound 10

Sodium hydride (60% in mineral oil) (42 mg; 1.05 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 12 (200 mg; 0.52 mmol) in DMF (4 mL) at 5° C. under N₂ flow. The reaction was stirred at 5° C. for 30 min. A solution of (R)-5-(Hydroxy-methyl)-2-pyrrolidinone-p-toluenesulfonate (353 mg; 1.31 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was added at 5° C. under N₂ flow over a period of 2 hours and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight.

The reaction mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine (twice), dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (370 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 30 g; mobile phase: 0.2% NH₄OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The fractions containing the product were collected and evaporated to dryness. The resulting residue (115 mg) was crystallized from CH₃CN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with Et₂O and dried yielding 92 mg (36%) of compound 10.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.12-9.43 (m, 1H), 9.09 (s, 1H), 8.73 (s, 1H), 8.33 (s., 1H), 7.75 (s, 1H), 6.62-6.87 (m, 2H), 4.08-4.49 (m, 1H), 3.90-4.03 (m, 5H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 3.77 (s, 3H), 2.03-2.28 (m, 3H), 1.64-1.90 (m, 1H)

m/z (%) (tr 2.83) 479 (100) [M+H]⁺ (Method C1).

[α]_(d): −14.11° (589 nm, c: 0.326 w/v %, DMF, 20° C.)

MP=198° C. (Kofler).

EXAMPLE B10 Preparation of Compound 11

Sodium hydride (60% in mineral oil) (42 mg; 1.05 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 12 (200 mg; 0.52 mmol) in DMF (4 mL) at 5° C. under N₂ flow. The reaction was stirred at 5° C. for 30 min. A solution of (S)-5-(Hydroxy-methyl)-2-pyrrolidinone-p-toluenesulfonate (353 mg; 1.311 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was added at 5° C. under N₂ flow over a 2 hours period and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight.

The reaction mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine (twice), dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (356 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm 30 g; mobile phase: 0.2% NH₄OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The fractions containing the product were collected and evaporated to dryness. The resulting residue (210 mg) was crystallized from CH₃CN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with Et₂O and dried yielding 90 mg (35%) of compound 11.

¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆, 400 MHz): δ=9.12-9.39 (m., 1 H), 9.09 (s, 1 H), 8.72 (s, 1 H), 8.33 (s, 1 H), 7.75 (s, 1 H), 6.63-6.87 (m, 2 H), 4.10-4.44 (m, 1 H), 3.90-4.05 (m, 5 H), 3.87 (s, 3 H), 3.77 (s, 3 H), 2.01-2.27 (m, 3 H), 1.66-1.88 ppm (m, 1 H).

m/z (%) (tr 2.83) 479 (100) [M+H]⁺ (Method C1)

[α]_(d): +13.43° (589 nm, c: 0.335 w/v %, DMF, 20° C.)

M.P.: 211° C. (Kofler)

EXAMPLE B11 Preparation of Compound 12

Sodium hydride (60% in mineral oil) (56.6 mg; 1.42 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of intermediate 12 (270 mg; 0.71 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) at 5° C. under N₂ flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5° C. for 30 min, then 2-(chloromethyl)-N,N-dimethyl-1H-imidazole-sulfonamide (CAS 935862-81-0) (303.6 mg; 1.36 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred all over the week end. The reaction mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 415 mg (quantitative) of compound 12 which was directly engaged in the next step without any further treatment.

C. Conversion Reactions EXAMPLE C1 Preparation of Compound 2

HCl 4M in dioxane (234 μL; 0.93 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of compound 1 (137 mg; 0.23 mmol) in CH₃CN (10 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature all over the week end. The reaction mixture was diluted with DCM/MeOH (90/10) and poured onto a 10% solution of K₂CO₃. The organic layer was decanted, washed with water, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular 15-40 μm 30 g; mobile phase: 0.3% NH₄OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The residue was crystallized from CH₃CN/Et₂O. The precipitate was filtered and dried, yielding 75 mg (63%) of compound 2.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.82 (br. s., 1H), 9.19-9.49 (m, 1H), 9.10-9.18 (m, 1H), 8.66-8.82 (m, 1H), 8.26-8.46 (m, 1H), 6.93-7.09 (m, 2H), 6.73 (s, 1H), 5.19-5.30 (m, 2H), 3.83-3.99 (m, 9H);

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 2.22) 480 (100) [M+H]⁺, 959 (20) [2M+H]⁺ (method B1);

M.P.: 158° C. (Kofler).

EXAMPLE C2 Preparation of Compound 13

Hydrogen chloride (4 M in dioxane) (708 μL; 2.83 mmol) was added drop wise to a solution of compound 12 (402 mg; 0.708 mmol) in CH₃CN (30 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours.

The reaction mixture was diluted with DCM/MeOH (90/10) and poured onto an aqueous 10% solution of K₂CO₃. The organic layer was decanted, washed with water, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 50 g; mobile phase: 0.1% NH₄OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The fractions containing the product were mixed and concentrated. The resulting residue (67 mg) was crystallized from CH₃CN/Et₂O. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 40 mg (12%) of compound 13.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.84 (s, 1H), 9.10 (s, 1H), 8.74 (s, 1H), 8.35 (s, 1H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 6.80 (s, 1H), 6.75-6.65 (m, 1H), 6.62-6.49 (m., 1H), 4.90-5.65 (m, 2H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.68 (s, 3H).

MS (ESI⁺) m/z (%) (r.t. 2.20) 462 (100) [M+H]⁺ (method B1)

MP=199° C. (Kofler).

Analytical Part

LC/GC/NMR

General Procedure A

The HPLC measurement was performed using an Alliance HT 2795 (Waters) system comprising a quaternary pump with degasser, an autosampler, a diode-array detector (DAD) and a column as specified in the respective methods below, the column is hold at a temperature of 30° C. Flow from the column was split to a MS spectrometer. The MS detector was configured with an electrospray ionization source. The capillary needle voltage was 3 kV and the source temperature was maintained at 100° C. on the LCT (Time of Flight Zspray™ mass spectrometer from Waters—for method A4), and 3.15 kV at 110° C. on the ZQ™ (simple quadrupole Zspray™ mass spectrometer from Waters—for methods A1 to A3). Nitrogen was used as the nebulizer gas. Data acquisition was performed with a Waters-Micromass MassLynx-Openlynx data system.

General Procedure B

The LC measurement was performed using a UPLC (Ultra Performance Liquid Chromatography) Acquity (Waters) system comprising a binary pump with degasser, an autosampler, a diode-array detector (DAD) and a column as specified in the respective methods below, the column is hold at a temperature of 40° C. Flow from the column was brought to a MS detector. The MS detector was configured with an electrospray ionization source. The capillary needle voltage was 3 kV and the source temperature was maintained at 130° C. on the Quattro (triple quadrupole mass spectrometer from Waters). Nitrogen was used as the nebulizer gas. Data acquisition was performed with a Waters-Micromass MassLynx-Openlynx data system.

General Procedure C

The LC measurement was performed using a UPLC (Ultra Performance Liquid Chromatography) H-Class (Waters) system comprising a quaternary pump with degasser, an autosampler, a diode-array detector (DAD) and a column as specified in the respective methods below, the column is hold at a temperature of 40° C. Flow from the column was brought to a MS detector. The MS detector was configured with an electrospray ionization source. The capillary needle voltage was 3. kV and the source temperature was maintained at 130° C. on the SQD2 (simple quadrupole mass spectrometer from Waters). Nitrogen was used as the nebulizer gas. Data acquisition was performed with a Waters-Micromass MassLynx-Openlynx data system.

Method A1

In addition to the general procedure A: Reversed phase HPLC was carried out on a Waters Atlantis C18 column (5 μm, 3.9×100 mm) with a flow rate of 0.8 ml/min. Three mobile phases (mobile phase A: 100% 7 mM ammonium acetate; mobile phase B: 100% acetonitrile; mobile phase C: 0.2% formic acid+99.8% ultra-pure Water) were employed to run a gradient condition from 50% A, 0% B and 50% C (hold for 1.5 minutes) to 10% A, 80% B and 10% in 3.5 minutes, hold in these conditions for 4 minutes and reequilibrated with initial conditions for 3 minutes. An injection volume of 10 μl was used. Cone voltage was 20 V for positive and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.4 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.3 seconds.

Method A2

In addition to the general procedure A: Reversed phase HPLC was carried out on a X-Bridge C18 column (3.5 μm, 4.6×100 mm) with a flow rate of 0.8 ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: 100% 7 mM ammonium acetate; mobile phase B: 100% acetonitrile; were employed to run a gradient condition from 80% A, 20% B (hold for 0.5 minute) to 10% A, 90% B in 4.5 minutes, hold at 10% A and 90% B for 4 minutes and reequilibrated with initial conditions for 3 minutes. An injection volume of 10 μl was used. Cone voltage was 20 V for positive and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.4 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.3 seconds.

Method A3

In addition to the general procedure A: Reversed phase HPLC was carried out on a Kromasil C18 column (3.5 μm, 4.6×100 mm) with a flow rate of 0.8 ml/min. Three mobile phases (mobile phase A: 100% 7 mM ammonium acetate; mobile phase B: 100% acetonitrile; mobile phase C: 0.2% formic acid+99.8% ultra-pure water) were employed to run a gradient condition from 35% A, 30% B and 35% C (hold for 1 minute) to 100% B in 4 minutes, 100% B for 4 minutes and reequilibrated with initial conditions for 2 minutes. An injection volume of 10 μl was used. Cone voltage was 20 V for positive and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.4 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.3 seconds.

Method A4

In addition to the general procedure A: Reversed phase HPLC was carried out on a Supelco Ascentis Express C18 column (2.7 μm, 3.0×50 mm) with a flow rate of 0.7 ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: 100% 7 mM ammonium acetate; mobile phase B: 100% acetonitrile) were employed to run a gradient condition from 80% A and 20% B (hold for 0.5 minute) to 5% A and 95% B in 2.5 minutes, hold for 4.5 minutes and back to initial conditions in 1.5 minutes and hold for 1 min. An injection volume of 5 μl was used. Cone voltage was 20 V for positive and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.4 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.3 seconds.

Method B1

In addition to the general procedure B: Reversed phase UPLC was carried out on a Waters Acquity BEH (bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid) C18 column (1.7 μm, 2.1×100 mm) with a flow rate of 0.343 ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: 95% 7 mM ammonium acetate/5% acetonitrile; mobile phase B: 100% acetonitrile) were employed to run a gradient condition from 84.2% A and 15.8% B (hold for 0.49 minutes) to 10.5% A and 89.5% B in 2.18 minutes, hold for 1.94 min and back to the initial conditions in 0.73 min, hold for 0.73 minutes. An injection volume of 2 μl was used. Cone voltage was 20V for positive and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.2 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.1 seconds.

Method B2

In addition to the general procedure B: Reversed phase UPLC was carried out on a Waters Acquity BEH (bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid) C18 column (1.7 μm, 2.1×100 mm) with a flow rate of 0.35 ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: 95% 7 mM ammonium acetate/5% acetonitrile; mobile phase B: 100% acetonitrile) were employed to run a gradient condition from 90% A and 10% B (hold for 0.5 minutes) to 8% A and 92% B in 3.5 minutes, hold for 2 min and back to the initial conditions in 0.5 min, hold for 1.5 minutes. An injection volume of 2 μl was used. Cone voltage was 20 V for positive and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.2 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.1 seconds.

Method C1

In addition to the general procedure C: Reversed phase UPLC was carried out on a Waters Acquity BEH (bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid) C18 column (1.7 μm, 2.1×100 mm) with a flow rate of 0.343 ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: 95% 7 mM ammonium acetate/5% acetonitrile; mobile phase B: 100% acetonitrile) were employed to run a gradient condition from 84.2% A and 15.8% B (hold for 0.49 minutes) to 10.5% A and 89.5% B in 2.18 minutes, hold for 1.94 min and back to the initial conditions in 0.73 min, hold for 0.73 minutes. An injection volume of 2 μl was used. Cone voltage was 20V for positive and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.15 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.05 seconds.

Melting Points

DSC:

Melting points (m.p.) were determined with a DSC1 (Mettler-Toledo). Melting points were measured with a temperature gradient of 10 C/minute. Maximum temperature was 350° C. Values are peak values.

For a number of compounds, melting points were obtained with a Kofler hot bench, consisting of a heated plate with linear temperature gradient, a sliding pointer and a temperature scale in degrees Celsius.

NMR

The NMR experiments were carried out using a Bruker Avance 500 III and a Bruker Avance DRX 400 spectrometers at ambient temperature, using internal deuterium lock and equipped with reverse triple-resonance (¹H, ¹³C, ¹⁵N TXI) probe head for the 500 MHz and with reverse double-resonance (¹H, ¹³C, SEI) probe head for the 400 MHz. Chemical shifts (δ) are reported in parts per million (ppm).

Pharmacological Part

Biological Assays A

FGFR1 (Enzymatic Assay)

In a final reaction volume of 30 μL, FGFR1 (h) (25 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCl₂, 1 mM DTT, 0.1 mM Na₃VO₄, 0.01% Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 5 μM ATP in the presence of compound (1% DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

FGFR2 (Enzymatic Assay)

In a final reaction volume of 30 μL, FGFR2 (h) (150 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCl₂, 1 mM DTT, 0.1 mM Na₃VO₄, 0.01% Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 0.4 μM ATP in the presence of compound (1% DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

FGFR3 (Enzymatic Assay)

In a final reaction volume of 30 μL, FGFR3 (h) (40 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCl₂, 1 mM DTT, 0.1 mM Na₃VO₄, 0.01% Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 25 μM ATP in the presence of compound (1% DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

FGFR4 (Enzymatic Assay)

In a final reaction volume of 30 μL, FGFR4 (h) (60 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCl₂, 1 mM DTT, 0.1 mM Na₃VO₄, 0.01% Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 5 μM ATP in the presence of compound (1% DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

KDR (VEGFR2) (Enzymatic Assay)

In a final reaction volume of 30 μL, KDR (h) (150 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCl₂, 1 mM DTT, 0.1 mM Na₃VO₄, 0.01% Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 3 μM ATP in the presence of compound (1% DMSO final). After incubation for 120 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

Ba/F3-FGFR1 (Minus IL3 or Plus IL3) (Cellular Proliferation Assay)

In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 μl cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10% FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 μg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3-FGFR1-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37° C. and 5% CO₂. After 24 hours, 10 μl of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K₃Fe(CN)₆, 0.5 mM K₄Fe(CN)₆, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37° C. and 5% CO₂ before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.

In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value. As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine IL3.

Ba/F3-FGFR3 (Minus IL3 or Plus IL3) (Cellular Proliferation Assay)

In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 μl cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10% FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 μg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3-FGFR3-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37° C. and 5% CO₂. After 24 hours, 10 μl of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K₃Fe(CN)₆, 0.5 mM K₄Fe(CN)₆, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37° C. and 5% CO₂ before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.

In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value. As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine IL3.

Ba/F3-KDR (Minus IL3 or Plus IL3) (Cellular Proliferation Assay)

In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 μl cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10% FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 μg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3-KDR-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37° C. and 5% CO₂. After 24 hours, 10 μl of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K₃Fe(CN)₆, 0.5 mM K₄Fe(CN)₆, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37° C. and 5% CO₂ before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.

In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value. As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine IL3.

Ba/F3-FGFR4 (Cellular Proliferation Assay)

In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 μl cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10% FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 μg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3-FGFR4-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37° C. and 5% CO2. After 24 hours, 10 μl of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K₃Fe(CN)₆, 0.5 mM K₄Fe(CN)₆, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37° C. and 5% CO₂ before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.

In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

Data for the compounds of the invention in the above assays are provided in Table A1

TABLE A1 BAF3- BAF3- BAF3- BAF3- FGFR1 BAF3- FGFR3 BAF3- KDR VEGFR FGFR1 (PLUS FGFR3 (PLUS KDR (PLUS BAF3- Comp. FGFR 1 FGFR 2 hFGFR3 FGFR 4 KDR (MIN IL3 IL3 (MIN IL3 IL3 (MIN IL3 IL3 FGFR4 No. pIC50 pIC50 pIC50 pIC50 pIC50 pIC50) pIC50) pIC50) pIC50) pIC50) pIC50) (pIC50) 1 8.1 8.0 7.4 7.0 7.0 7.0 5.0 7.0 <5 5.1 <5 5.8 2 8.5 8.4 8.5 8.5 7.6 8.2 <5 ~8.1 <5 ~6.1 <5 7.6 3 7.1 7.5 7.6 7.0 <6 5.5 <5 5.7 <5 <5 <5 <5 4 7.0 6.8 7.1 6.5 <6 5.6 <5 ~5.6 <5 <5 <5 ~5.1 7 7.3 6.8 7.4 6.9 <6 5.8 <5 6.0 <5 <5 <5 5.1 8 7.6 7.6 8.0 7.4 6.1 6.3 <5 6.3 <5 <5 <5 6.0 9 7.5 7.6 7.6 7.1 6.4 6.7 <5 6.7 <5 5.6 <5 6.2 10 6.8 6.7 6.9 ~6.3 6.0 5.3 <5 5.7 <5 <5 <5 5.3 11 6.7 6.5 7.0 6.5 <6 5.6 <5 5.7 <5 <5 <5 5.3 13 8.4 8.1 8.4 8.1 6.6 7.4 <5 ~7.6 <5 5.4 <5 6.7 

The invention claimed is:
 1. A method of inhibiting fibroblast growth factor receptor kinase activity in a subject suffering from, or being at risk of suffering from a disease state or condition mediated by a fibroblast growth factor receptor kinase, said method comprising administering to the subject a compound selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I):

a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein W represents —N(R³)— or —C(R^(3a)R^(3b))—; each R² independently represents hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, C₂₋₄alkynyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, haloC₁₋₄alkyl, haloC₁₋₄alkoxy, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, haloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl wherein each C₁₋₄alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with —C(═O)—R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with —NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸, —NR⁷R⁸ or —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸; or when two R² groups are attached to adjacent carbon atoms they may be taken together to form a radical of formula: —O—(C(R¹⁷)₂)_(p)—O—; —X—CH═CH—; or —X—CH═N—; wherein R¹⁷ represents hydrogen or fluorine, p represents 1 or 2 and X represents O or S; D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more R¹ groups; R¹ represents hydrogen, halo, cyano, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, —NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵, —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl-NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, —C(═O)—R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; R^(3a) represents —NR¹⁰R¹¹, hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxy substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkenyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ and optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; R^(3b) represents hydrogen or hydroxyl; provided that if R^(3a) represents —NR¹⁰R¹¹, then R^(3b) represents hydrogen; or R^(3a) and R^(3b) are taken together to form ═O, to form ═NR¹⁰, to form cyclopropyl together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, to form ═CH—C₀₋₄alkyl substituted with R^(3c), or to form

 wherein ring A represents a monocyclic 5 to 7 membered saturated heterocyclyl containing one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heteroatom not being positioned in alpha position of the double bond, wherein ring A is optionally substituted with cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, H₂N—C₁₋₄alkyl, (C₁₋₄alkyl)NH—C₁₋₄alkyl, (C₁₋₄alkyl)₂N—C₁₋₄alkyl, (haloC₁₋₄alkyl)NH—C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, —C(═O)—NH₂, —C(═O)—NH(C₁₋₄alkyl), —C(═O)—N(C₁₋₄alkyl)₂; R^(3c) represents hydrogen, hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, R⁹, —NR¹⁰R¹¹, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, cyano, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl or —CH(OH)—C₁₋₆alkyl; R³ represents hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxy substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkenyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ and optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; R⁴ and R⁵ each independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R¹³; R⁶ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S; said C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, optionally and each independently being substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being selected from cyano, C₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, halogen, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵; R⁷ and R⁸ each independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl; R⁹ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S, said C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl each optionally and each independently being substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being selected from ═O, C₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, cyano, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₄alkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl wherein each C₁₋₄alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, halogen, haloC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkoxy, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₄alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with R¹³, phenyl optionally substituted with R¹⁶, phenylC₁₋₆alkyl wherein the phenyl is optionally substituted with R¹⁶, or a 5 or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S wherein said heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R¹⁶; or when two of the substituents of R⁹ are attached to the same atom, they may be taken together to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S; R¹⁰ and R¹¹ each independently represent hydrogen, carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, —C(═O)—R⁶, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)-hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)-hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆ alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵; R¹² represents hydrogen or C₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₄alkoxy; R¹³ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl or a saturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S, wherein said C₃₋₈cycloalkyl or monocyclic heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 substituents each independently selected from halogen, hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, ═O, cyano, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, or —NR¹⁴R¹⁵; R¹⁴ and R¹⁵ each independently represent hydrogen, or haloC₁₋₄alkyl, or C₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted with a substituent selected from hydroxyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, amino or mono- or di(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino; R¹⁶ represents hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵ or —C(═O)NR¹⁴R¹⁵; and n independently represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 2. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 3. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein W is —N(R³)—, D represents phenyl or a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl, wherein said phenyl or heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more R¹ groups; n represents 2, 3 or 4; each R² independently represents C₁₋₄alkoxy or halogen; R³ is hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹; and R¹⁰ and R¹¹ each independently represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 4. A method according to claim 3 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein D is phenyl or optionally substituted pyrazolyl; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 5. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein W represents —N(R³)—, D represents phenyl or a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl, wherein said phenyl or heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more R¹ groups; n represents 2, 3 or 4; each R² independently represents C₁₋₄alkoxy or halogen; R³ is hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹; and R¹⁰ and R¹¹ each independently represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl.
 6. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein n represents 2 or 4; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 7. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein D represents optionally substituted pyrazolyl; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 8. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 9. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein each R² independently represents C₁₋₄alkoxy or halogen; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 10. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 11. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein W is —N(R³)—; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 12. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein W is —C(R^(3a)R^(3b))—; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 13. A method according to claim 1, wherein the subject is a subject suffering from, or being at risk of suffering from cancer.
 14. A method according to claim 13, wherein the cancer is selected from multiple myeloma, myeloproliferative disorders, endometrial cancer, prostate cancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, breast cancer, gastric cancer, colorectal cancer, and oral squamous cell carcinoma.
 15. A method according to claim 14, wherein the cancer is multiple myeloma.
 16. A method according to claim 14, wherein the cancer is bladder cancer.
 17. A method according to claim 13, wherein the cancer is selected from lung cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, liver cancer, kidney cancer, breast cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, and prostate cancer.
 18. A method according to claim 13, wherein the cancer is urothelial carcinoma.
 19. A method according to claim 1, wherein the subject is a subject suffering from, or being at risk of suffering from a carcinoma, wherein the carcinoma is selected from a carcinoma of the bladder, breast, colon, kidney, epidermis, liver, lung, oesophagus, head and neck, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas, stomach, gastrointestinal cancer, cervix, endometrium, thyroid, prostate, or skin, a hematopoietic tumor of lymphoid lineage; a hematopoietic tumor of myeloid lineage; multiple myeloma; thyroid follicular cancer; a tumor of mesenchymal origin; a tumor of the central or peripheral nervous system; melanoma; seminoma; teratocarcinoma; osteosarcoma; xeroderma pigmentosum; keratoctanthoma; or Kaposi's sarcoma.
 20. A method according to claim 13, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein W is —N(R³)—, D represents phenyl or a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl, wherein said phenyl or heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more R¹ groups; n represents 2, 3 or 4; each R² independently represents C₁₋₄alkoxy or halogen; R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹; and R¹⁰ and R¹¹ each independently represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl.
 21. A method according to claim 19, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I), a tautomeric form, and stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein W represents —N(R³)—, D represents phenyl or a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl, wherein said phenyl or heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more R¹ groups; n represents 2, 3 or 4; each R² independently represents C₁₋₄alkoxy or halogen; R³ represents hydroxylC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹; and R¹⁰ and R¹¹ each independently represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl. 